Tfden 001 Setup

1403, TFDEN-001-009, 001
FD CONTROLLER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SETUP MANUAL
9th edition
・Before attempting to operate the robot, please read through this operating manual
carefully, and comply with all the safety-related items and instructions in the text.
・The installation, operation and maintenance of this robot should be undertaken only
by those individuals who have attended one of our robot course.
・When using this robot, observe the low related with industrial robot and with
safety issues in each country.
・This operating manual must be given without fail to the individual who will be actually
operating the robot.
・Please direct any queries about parts of this operating manual which may not be
completely clear or any inquiries concerning the after-sale service of this robot to any
of the service centers listed on the back cover.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Point on Safety

1.1 For safe use of the robot system...................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.1 Symbols used in all the instruction manuals ............................................................................. 1-1
1.1.2 General precautions for safe use of the robot system............................................................... 1-2
1.1.3 Safety Measures on manipulator............................................................................................... 1-4
1.1.4 Safety measures in teaching and inspection............................................................................. 1-5
1.1.5 Safety measures in test run ....................................................................................................... 1-8
1.1.6 Safety measures in auto operation............................................................................................ 1-8
1.1.7 Brake Positive Release............................................................................................................ 1-10
1.1.8 Movement, alienation and selling of robot system .................................................................. 1-10
1.1.9 Storage of robot system........................................................................................................... 1-10
1.1.10 Disposition of Robot system .................................................................................................... 1-10
1.1.11 Labels and marks on manipulator and controller .................................................................... 1-12
1.2 To ensure the safety of arc welding................................................................................................ 1-16
1.2.1 Preventing electric shock accidents ........................................................................................ 1-16
1.2.2 Protection from fumes and gases given off during welding..................................................... 1-17
1.2.3 Protection from the arc light, spatters and slugs generated during welding ........................... 1-18
1.2.4 Preventing fire- and explosion-related accidents caused by the base metal, spatter, slag or arc
sparks ...................................................................................................................................... 1-19
1.2.5 Preventing gas cylinder from toppling over or rupturing and protecting gas flow regulators from
overheating, impact, etc........................................................................................................... 1-20
1.3 Precautions for undertaking work inside the manipulator’s work area .......................................... 1-21
Chapter 2 Transportation and Installation

2.1 From the installation work to the teaching work............................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Transportation .................................................................................................................................. 2-2

2.2.1 Manipulator ................................................................................................................................ 2-2
2.2.2 Controller ................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.3 Robot Installation.............................................................................................................................. 2-4
2.4 Installation of robot controller ........................................................................................................... 2-4

2.4.1 Robot controller installation location and environment.............................................................. 2-4
2.4.2 Install dimensions of robot controller ......................................................................................... 2-4
2.4.3 Installation place of robot controller........................................................................................... 2-5
2.4.4 Install method of robot controller ............................................................................................... 2-6
Chapter 3 Connections
3.1 Summary of Connection Work to Robot Controller.......................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Precautions for Cable connections .................................................................................................. 3-2
3.3 Manipulator connection .................................................................................................................... 3-3

3.3.1 NB4 / NV6 / NB4L / NV6L / NB15 / NV20 / NH5 connection ..................................................... 3-3
3.3.2 NV50 / NV166 / NV210 connection ........................................................................................... 3-9
3.3.3 SRA/MC/MR/LP/SC/ST/ST210TP/VS connection .................................................................. 3-14
3.4 Teach pendant connection ............................................................................................................. 3-15
3.5 Operation box & Starting box connection....................................................................................... 3-18
1
Table of Contents
3.5.1 Operation box connection........................................................................................................ 3-18

3.5.2 Starting box connection ........................................................................................................... 3-20
3.6 Installation of Optional board for physical I/O signals .................................................................... 3-21
3.6.1 Arc I/F Board Installation ......................................................................................................... 3-22
3.6.2 Relay Unit + I/O Board Installation .......................................................................................... 3-24
3.6.3 I/O Board Installation ............................................................................................................... 3-27
3.7 Safety-related signal connections .................................................................................................. 3-30
3.7.1 Sequence board ...................................................................................................................... 3-30
3.7.2 Position of the terminal block................................................................................................... 3-31
3.7.3 Pin layout of Terminal blocks ................................................................................................... 3-32
3.7.4 Electrical specification of input terminal block ......................................................................... 3-36
3.7.5 Electrical specifications of output terminal block ..................................................................... 3-36
3.7.6 Connection procedures on input terminal block ...................................................................... 3-37
3.7.7 Emergency stop output connection (TBEX2 : 1-2, 3-4)........................................................... 3-40
3.8 Power connections ......................................................................................................................... 3-41
3.8.1 Prior to Primary power supply connections ............................................................................. 3-41
3.8.2 Primary power supply connections.......................................................................................... 3-42
3.8.3 Grounding ................................................................................................................................ 3-45
3.9 Signal specifications of Optional Physical I/O board...................................................................... 3-48
3.9.1 Common items......................................................................................................................... 3-48
3.9.2 I/O signal specifications of Arc I/F board ................................................................................. 3-50
3.9.3 I/O signal specifications of Relay unit with I/O board .............................................................. 3-55
3.9.4 I/O signal specifications of I/O board....................................................................................... 3-61
Chapter 4 Setup
4.1 How to read “Chapter 4 Setup” ........................................................................................................ 4-1
4.2 Configuration .................................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.3 Mounting a tool................................................................................................................................. 4-3

4.3.1 Mounting a tool (SRA166-01) .................................................................................................... 4-3
4.3.2 Mounting a tool (NV6/NV6L/NV20)............................................................................................ 4-4
4.3.3 Performing encoder reset and encoder correction .................................................................... 4-5
4.4 User load (service load) setting...................................................................................................... 4-11
4.5 Tool constant settings..................................................................................................................... 4-13

4.5.1 Tool name ................................................................................................................................ 4-14
4.5.2 Tool length................................................................................................................................ 4-15
4.5.3 Tool angle................................................................................................................................. 4-20
4.5.4 Center of gravity (COG) and weight of tool ............................................................................. 4-21
4.5.5 Tool’s moment of inertia........................................................................................................... 4-26
4.5.6 Max, radius of tool ................................................................................................................... 4-33
4.5.7 Tool length and angles of Daihen’s arc welding torch ............................................................. 4-34
4.5.8 Tool conversion........................................................................................................................ 4-39
4.6 Signal attribute settings .................................................................................................................. 4-41
4.6.1 Standard signal attributes assignment..................................................................................... 4-42
4.6.2 Standard input signals ............................................................................................................. 4-43
4.6.3 Standard output signals ........................................................................................................... 4-45
4.6.4 How to copy the I/O settings between the controllers ............................................................. 4-50
4.7 Concerning the qualifications of the operators............................................................................... 4-55
4.7.1 Operation qualifications ........................................................................................................... 4-55
4.7.2 Procedure for changing the operator qualifications................................................................. 4-56
4.7.3 How to change the passwords ................................................................................................ 4-57
4.7.4 How to set the operator qualifications class at power-on........................................................ 4-58
4.8 I/O area mapping function.............................................................................................................. 4-59
2
Table of Contents
4.8.1 I/O area mapping ..................................................................................................................... 4-59

4.8.2 Relation with software PLC...................................................................................................... 4-62
4.8.3 Setting method......................................................................................................................... 4-63
4.8.4 Example 1 : Using only field bus as external I/O signals with PLC disconnected................... 4-65
4.8.5 Example 2: Using only I/O board 1 – field bus CH1 with PLC disconnected .......................... 4-66
4.8.6 Example 3: Forcibly inputting / outputting signals of I/O board 1 as I1-I32 with PLC enabled 4-67
4.9 High Speed Interference Detection ................................................................................................ 4-68
4.9.1 Outline of High Speed Interference Detection ......................................................................... 4-68
4.9.2 Applied machine types............................................................................................................. 4-68
4.9.3 Parameters that must be set in advance to use this function.................................................. 4-68
4.9.4 “Interference setting” screen.................................................................................................... 4-69
4.9.5 Switching Detection Level by Function.................................................................................... 4-70
4.9.6 As for the mistake in interference detection ............................................................................ 4-70
4.9.7 Trouble shooting ...................................................................................................................... 4-70
4.10 Setting the application type ............................................................................................................ 4-71
4.11 Setting the [CLAMP / ARC] key ..................................................................................................... 4-73
4.12 Setting the software limit (operating range) ................................................................................... 4-75

4.12.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................... 4-75
4.12.2 [Position record] screen settings ............................................................................................. 4-76
4.13 User defined error .......................................................................................................................... 4-77
4.14 User coordinate system ................................................................................................................. 4-78

4.14.1 Setting example ....................................................................................................................... 4-78
4.14.2 Stationary tool .......................................................................................................................... 4-81
4.15 How to copy the softkey settings between the controllers ............................................................. 4-84
4.15.1 Exporting the setting file .......................................................................................................... 4-84
4.15.2 Importing the setting file........................................................................................................... 4-86
Chapter 5 Spot welding setup

5.1 Overview of setup work .................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Assignment of spot welding input/output signals ............................................................................. 5-2

5.2.1 Spot welding input signals ......................................................................................................... 5-2
5.2.2 Spot welding output signals ....................................................................................................... 5-2
5.3 Settings inherent to a servo gun ...................................................................................................... 5-4
5.3.1 Servo gun condition ................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.3.2 Tip consumption detection......................................................................................................... 5-7
Chapter6 Arc welding setup

6.1 Outline of setup work........................................................................................................................ 6-1
6.1.1 Setup relating to welding power supply ..................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.2 Setup relating to external input/output signals .......................................................................... 6-1
6.2 Checking the welding characteristics data and wire feed characteristics data................................ 6-2
6.3 Allocating the dedicated arc welding input/output signals ............................................................... 6-4
6.3.1 Allocating the dedicated arc welding input/output signals ......................................................... 6-4
6.3.2 Table of input signals ................................................................................................................. 6-5
6.3.3 Table of output signals ............................................................................................................... 6-6
Chapter 7 Preparations for automatic operation
3
Table of Contents
7.1 Specification of the operation method .............................................................................................. 7-1

7.1.1 Controller operation ................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.2 External operation...................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.3 Multi-station operation ............................................................................................................... 7-6
7.1.4 “Motors ON external” signal assignment ................................................................................... 7-7
7.2 Setting multi-station operation.......................................................................................................... 7-8
7.2.1 Connecting the operation boxes and start boxes ...................................................................... 7-8
7.2.2 Registering the number of stations............................................................................................ 7-8
7.2.3 Allocating the start signals (only when using stations 5 to 10) .................................................. 7-9
7.2.4 Allocating the input/output signals for multi-station use ............................................................ 7-9
7.2.5 Allocating the program to be started........................................................................................ 7-10
7.3 Home position registration ............................................................................................................. 7-11
7.3.1 Home position registration by referencing the program .......................................................... 7-11
7.3.2 Home position registration by manual recording ..................................................................... 7-14
7.3.3 Home position registration by numeric input ........................................................................... 7-15
7.4 Registering Start Enable Area ........................................................................................................ 7-16
7.4.1 Registering the start enable area ............................................................................................ 7-16
7.4.2 Checking the unit if it is in the start enable area...................................................................... 7-17
7.4.3 Checking which axis is out of the start enable area ................................................................ 7-17
7.5 READY status output signals ......................................................................................................... 7-18
7.5.1 Controller READY signals........................................................................................................ 7-18
7.5.2 Unit READY signal................................................................................................................... 7-18
7.5.3 Status output signals................................................................................................................ 7-20
7.6 Interference Territory registration ................................................................................................... 7-23
7.6.1 Registering the interference Territory ...................................................................................... 7-23
7.6.2 Utilizing the Interference Territory ............................................................................................ 7-26
Chapter 8 Connection to Ethernet

8.1 Outline .............................................................................................................................................. 8-1
8.1.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................ 8-1
8.1.2 Network setting .......................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.3 Connection of Ethernet cable .................................................................................................... 8-2
8.1.4 File transfer process .................................................................................................................. 8-2
8.2 Ethernet setting ................................................................................................................................ 8-3
8.2.1 TCP/IP setting............................................................................................................................ 8-3
8.2.2 FTP setting................................................................................................................................. 8-5
8.3 File transfer (FTP client)................................................................................................................... 8-7
8.3.1 Registrations of FTP Server (Host) ........................................................................................... 8-7
8.3.2 File download............................................................................................................................. 8-9
8.3.3 File upload ............................................................................................................................... 8-11
8.3.4 Referent Log ............................................................................................................................ 8-12
8.4 File transfer (FTP server) ............................................................................................................... 8-13
4
Chapter 1 Point on Safety
This chapter explains the safety precautions to be observed when handling the robot
system. This section describes general precautions and procedures on safety but
does not show all of the safety measures. Therefore, it is necessary for customers to
prepare yourself a safety control standard including your own operational regulations
in accordance with the actual working environment and to conduct safety control in
order to secure the operators' safety.
1.1 For safe use of the robot system ................................................................... 1-1

1.1.1 Symbols used in all the instruction manuals .......................................... 1-1
1.1.2 General precautions for safe use of the robot system ........................... 1-2
1.1.3 Safety Measures on manipulator ........................................................... 1-4
1.1.4 Safety measures in teaching and inspection ......................................... 1-5
1.1.5 Safety measures in test run ................................................................... 1-8
1.1.6 Safety measures in auto operation ........................................................ 1-8
1.1.7 Brake Positive Release........................................................................ 1-10
1.1.8 Movement, alienation and selling of robot system ............................... 1-10
1.1.9 Storage of robot system....................................................................... 1-10
1.1.10 Disposition of Robot system ................................................................ 1-10
1.1.11 Labels and marks on manipulator and controller ................................. 1-12
1.2 To ensure the safety of arc welding ............................................................. 1-16
1.2.1 Preventing electric shock accidents..................................................... 1-16
1.2.2 Protection from fumes and gases given off during welding.................. 1-17
1.2.3 Protection from the arc light, spatters and slugs generated during welding1-
1.2.4 Preventing fire- and explosion-related accidents caused by the base
metal, spatter, slag or arc sparks....................................................................... 1-19
1.2.5 Preventing gas cylinder from toppling over or rupturing and protecting gas
flow regulators from overheating, impact, etc.................................................... 1-20
1.3 Precautions for undertaking work inside the manipulator’s work area ......... 1-21
ぺージあわせのため白文字（白文字のため印刷されないなので気にしないでください。削除しないでください。）
1.1 For safe use of the robot
1.1 For safe use of the robot system

Before using a robot system, read this manual and all other attached documents carefully, and make sure you
understand the correct information on the equipment and safety precautions.
1.1.1 Symbols used in all the instruction manuals

Safety information to prevent the injury to personnel and/or damage to equipment is classified
by the following symbols.
Cases where a mistake made in handling is likely to cause the user to be exposed
to the danger of death or serious injury and where the degree of the urgency
(imminence) of the warning given for the danger to occur is at the high end of the scale
DANGER (including high-level danger).
Cases where a mistake made in handling is likely to cause the user to be exposed to
the danger of death or serious injury.
WARNING
Cases where a mistake made in handling is likely to cause the user to be exposed to
the danger of minor injuries or of property damage only.
CAUTION
The following symbols are also used for important checkpoints:
A particularly important checkpoint is shown.

IMPORTANT
INFO.
Useful information is shown.
POINT Info for deeper understanding for the main text is shown.
1-1
1.1.2 General precautions for safe use of the robot system

This section describes general precautions to prevent the injury to personnel and/or damage to
equipment.
Conditions when a disaster struck while a robot system was used are shown in Table 1.1.1.
Table 1.1.1 Conditions when a disaster struck

Auto operation started without confirming there were no people inside the
Example 1
manipulator’s work area.
A person entered the manipulator’s work area which was in auto operation
Example 2
mode and the manipulator started unexpectedly.
A person paid attention to one manipulator forgetting another one was
Example 3
operating within reach of them.
Example 4 Sudden change of movement from low speed to high speed
Example 5 Manipulation by another operator without permission
The manipulator is operated by different program because of program

Example 6
mistakes or faulty peripheral equipment.
Work at a stop of a manipulator waiting for interlocking is released
Example 7
suddenly, and then the manipulator started to move unexpectedly.
Thus, a disaster by the robot system is caused by unsafe acts and unsafe conditions of an
operator. Therefore, it is important to remove unsafe acts and unsafe conditions by an operator
in order to prevent a disaster.
The followings are general precautions to prevent a disaster.

Be sure to obey the following precautions when you use a robot system,
Do not get near the manipulator.

Fatal or serious injury may result if a person is hit or caught by a manipulator due to
unexpected motion.
DANGER
Only perform work within the manipulator‘s work area after turning off the primary power
supply and circuit breaker on the robot controller.
DANGER
Make sure no one exists in the manipulator’s work area when the power is turned on.
DANGER
Operators must wear helmet, safety shoes and overalls.

DANGER
In case that inspection or maintenance work has to be done with a robot controller’s
power on, a watcher (third person) must be present outside the guarding fence and
watch the work at any time while being ready to press an emergency stop button
DANGER immediately.
1-2
power on, allocate, confirm and know an escape route prior to beginning work.
DANGER
Do not alter or remodel our products.

You may get injured or have your equipment damaged because of fire, failure or
malfunction caused by altering or remodeling the product.
DANGER The warranty does not cover any altered or remodeled products.
While robot controller is power ON, do not touch any parts in the robot controller.
Because protection against electric shock due to live part, wait 5 minutes after turning
off the mains power before working inside the controller.
DANGER
While robot controller is power ON, do not detach or attach any cables and their
connectors.
Failure to adhere to the precautions may cause the robot and/or controller to fail, break
CAUTION or operate in error.
In order to follow above precautions, it is necessary to thoroughly understand the cautions

described hereafter and observe them precisely.
1-3
1.1.3 Safety Measures on manipulator

The manipulator is of such design that no unnecessary protrusions or sharp corners
exist. It is made of suitable material for use in the environment for which it was designed
and has fail-safe construction to minimize damage or accidents during operation. The
manipulator maintains a good level of safety because various safety functions exist; such
as those to detect incorrect operation and stop the manipulator, or to make emergency
stops, interlocking with peripheral equipment, when either device threatens to damage
the other.
The manipulator is of multi-articular arm construction, thus each articular angle varies all
the time with manipulator movement. Take care and avoid getting pinched in various
articulations, especially when teaching. Pay careful attention to the stopper blocks
WARNING mounted on the moving tip of the articulations. The arm may fall under its own weight
when motors are removed or brakes are released. Therefore take action to prevent
dropping and check that conditions are safe before starting work.
Unless the arm is supported properly, it will drop if the motor is removed. Before
removing the motor, make absolutely sure that the arm is supported properly.
WARNING
Do not rely on the positioning pin alone to secure the arm since it may be inserted
incorrectly or inserted only half way in. Use a wooden block, sling or other means to
support the arm properly before attempting to remove the motor. The manipulator arm
must NOT be supported by a person's hand.
Never remove or disassemble a balancer as it is compressed under great pressure.

Removal is a very dangerous act.
CAUTION
Use specified bolt sizes and number. Be sure to tighten them to specified torque with a
torque wrench when fitting equipment onto the end effector flange or arms.
Use clean rust-free bolts. Otherwise bolts may loosen during operation leading to serious
CAUTION accidents and injuries.
When fabricating the end effector, set its weight and static load moment within the range
of the permissible load levels of the manipulator wrist.
CAUTION
Provide a failsafe construction which will ensure that the work gripped will not be
released or scattered even when the power or air supply to the end effector is cut off.
Also remove any sharp edges or protrusions in its construction to prevent injury to
CAUTION personnel and damage to property.
1-4
In order to operate the manipulator, services such as electric power, plant air and cooling
water for welding should be supplied. However, non-specified services may affect the
manipulator performance and cause abnormal behavior, errors or damage, resulting in a
CAUTION dangerous situation. Never use unspecified resources.
It is not possible to eliminate electromagnetic interference completely using the

technology available today although the extent of its elimination depends on the type and
strength of the interference concerned. In terms of what action to take while the
CAUTION manipulator is operating and while the power is on, follow the precautions to be observed
during operation. In some cases, electromagnetic waves, other forms of noise or
defective circuit boards may erase the recorded programs. As a safeguard, make
backups of the programs, constants, etc. on a Compact Flash card or other media.
1.1.4 Safety measures in teaching and inspection
Manipulator operators must only be those who have completed specified training
and are fully aware of safety and functions of the manipulators. Accidents may occur due
to mishandling of the manipulator during operation by those who do not know the correct
CAUTION procedures well.
power on, a watcher (third person) must be present outside the guarding fence and watch
the work at any time while being ready to press an emergency stop button immediately.
DANGER
Wear protective gear such as a helmet and safety boots when operating the robot or
entering its work area.
DANGER
Keep the robot's key switch and a safety plug for changing to Auto operation with you
when entering the manipulator’s work area so other people can not change the switch to
Auto operation accidentally. If the key is left in the switch other operators may accidentally
WARNING start Auto operation leading to serious accidents.
Display (attach) a sign showing "Teaching Under Way" on the operation panel when
teaching. Other operators are required to notice this fact. If not, they may start the Auto
WARNING operation, resulting in serious or fatal accidents.
When a number of operators are involved in the teaching of a manipulator, the

operator holding the teach pendant is in charge and must give commands and the others
must follow.
CAUTION Commands given by numerous operators may invite incorrect manipulation, leading to
accidents.
1-5
Consider methods to communicate with other operators such as hand signals when
conversation takes place among a number of operators positioned separately, in a large
system (plant) for example. Accidents are likely to occur due to misinterpreted intentions
CAUTION in a noisy site.
Examples of hand signals for industrial robot operation
1.Switch ON 2.Switch OFF
Act like pressing a switch. Raise the right hand high and then
swing it left and right clearly.
3.OK ? (Conf irmation) 4.OK !
Raise the right hand high with palm

Raise the right hand high with palm facing forward and thumb and index
facing forward. finger creating a circle.
5.Wait ! 6.Go away !
Face the right hand palm forward Extend the right hand horizontally
with its arm extended horizontally. and swing it to the left.
Keep a safe place (escape route) in mind at all times to quickly escape in an
emergency.
CAUTION
Pay attention to the manipulator's movement at all times and never work with your
back toward the manipulator. An operator may not notice the start of a manipulator if
WARNING he/she is not facing it resulting in an accident.
Press the emergency stop button immediately if you notice any abnormality. Make this
practice very clear to every operator.
WARNING A sudden movement may be imminent if you are watching something abnormal.
1-6
Prepare an appropriate working code and checklist for start up of the manipulator, how
to operate it and what actions to take in an emergency. Proceed with operation according
to the working code. Accidents are likely to occur due to forgetfulness and error of
CAUTION operators if relying on memory alone.
Proceed with work with the robot's power off when operation or manipulation of the
manipulator is not necessary. It can never run with its power off.
CAUTION
When teaching, always check the program number and step number before
operating the manipulator. Editing of incorrect programs or steps may cause accidents.
CAUTION
Protect completed programs from accidental editing by using the memory protect
function.
(The memory protect function disabling the editing of various programs and constants is
CAUTION available on the robot controller.)
Check manipulator movement at a low speed using the check go/back function
and the velocity override function after completing teaching. Accidents due to
collision are likely to occur if a program containing a mistake is checked at 100% full
CAUTION speed in the playback mode.
Clean the area within the guarding fence and check that tools, etc. are not left there after
teaching is complete. A workplace fouled with oil or grease and tools is a hazardous
place and may lead to an accident due to stumbling. "Cleaning the workplace" is a step
CAUTION toward safety.
Don’t turn on primary power for five seconds after turning off primary power.
CAUTION
LOCKOUT AND TAG OUT EQUIPMENT,

BEFORE SERVICING.
WARNING
Be absolutely sure NOT to expose the controller inside to direct sunlight, a searchlight or
other strong lights before turning on the primary power supply while the controller door is
left open to enable maintenance or other work to be performed.
WARNING Failure to adhere to the precautions may cause the manipulator and/or controller to fail or
operate in error.
1-7
Handling precautions of USB memory

1. Do not disassemble, alter and repair the USB memory by yourself. There is a
danger of a fire and / or electric shock.
WARNING 2. Read instruction manuals prior to use of the USB memory and obey the
precautions.
3. Do not use this product with wet hands. There is a danger of an electric shock and /
or a malfunction.
4. Prior to operating a USB memory, discharge static electricity charged on a worker.
Antistatic wrist band is effective. To touch a USB memory without countermeasures
may cause breakdown.
5. If smoke or badly smelling from the USB memory occurs, immediately shut down
the primary power and circuit breaker on the controller. After that, contact our
service center. If the damaged USB memory is continued to use, there is a danger
of an electric shock and / or fire.
6. Do not use the USB memory in a place where the water is used or with high
humidity. There is a danger of electric shock, fire and / or malfunction.
7. In case that a foreign object is mixed in the USB memory, shut down the primary
power supply and circuit breaker on the controller. After that, contact our service
center. If the damaged USB memory is continued to use, there is a danger of an
electric shock and / or fire.
8. Do not drop or give any shock to the USB memory. The USB memory is precision
equipment so that the malfunction may occur.
9. In case that dirt or dust adheres to the connector of USB memory, remove them
with dry and clean cloth. Use of it under dirty conditions causes the malfunction.
10. Do not wipe the USB memory with organic solvent such as thinner or benzine, etc.
11. Remove the dirt on the USB memory with dry and clean cloth. If the heavy grime is
adhered on the USB memory, let a little neutral detergent soak in the clean wet
cloth, squeeze it tightly and wipe it.
1.1.5 Safety measures in test run

In the test run, design errors, teaching errors or manufacturing errors may exist in addition to
probable errors in the teaching program, jigs, sequence, etc. Therefore the test run requires
greater safety consciousness. Perform a test run paying attention to the following points;
Check all buttons to stop the robot system, such as the emergency stop button, other stop
buttons, and the enable switch and that their signals work well. Then check the functions
associated with detection of abnormalities.
WARNING Confirmation of "stop" is most important. Accident or injury may result due to the
failure of a stop button or signal in an emergency.
When performing the test run, start the robot system up at a low speed (about 5%
to 10%), with the velocity override function, to check the movement. Repeat these
about 2 to 3 cycles. Correct any errors, if any, at once.
CAUTION Then gradually increase the speed (50% → 70% → 100%) and repeat 2 to 3 cycles at
each speed to confirm the movement.
It is difficult to stop a robot system, when an error occurs, before it causes damage if
checking is started at a full speed.
DO NOT enter a guarding fence at any speed during Automatic operation.

DANGER
1.1.6 Safety measures in auto operation
Install a guarding fence so that no one enters the manipulator’s work area during
Automatic operation.
WARNING
1-8
Clean the workplace and keep everything in order at the beginning and end of work.
If the workplace is littered with various items, accidents, such as tripping, may occur.
CAUTION
Ensure a daily inspection according to the specified check list is done before startup.
By discovering abnormalities in advance, accidents can be avoided.
CAUTION (Refer to Maintenance Manual for the daily inspection items.)
An "OFF LIMITS" sign should be displayed at all entrances of the guarding fence and all
employees made aware of this rule. If not, they may enter the guarding fence thinking that
CAUTION the manipulator is inoperable.
Always confirm there is no one within the guarding fence before starting auto
operation.
Accidents caused by neglecting to confirm a person's presence are the most typical.
DANGER
Start auto operation after confirming the program number, step number, mode and
startup select are all ready for auto operation. If the manipulator is started with an
incorrect program or step selected, unexpected incorrect movement may occur resulting
CAUTION in an accident.
Before starting automatic operation, move the manipulator to the step in which automatic
operation can be started using Check Go or Check Back. If the manipulator is not moved
to the requested step number, unexpected incorrect movement may occur directly after
CAUTION automatic operation is started which may result in an accident.
Before Start up, make sure the emergency stop button can be pressed immediately.
This is vital in dealing with unexpected occurrences.
CAUTION
Operators should be familiarized with the manipulator's movement path, operating

behavior, running sound, etc. so that abnormalities can be detected. Failures may be
avoided by recognizing abnormal behavior as abnormalities may indicate an imminent
CAUTION system failure. In order to detect these operators need to be fully aware of the normal
status of operation.
Make an emergency stop immediately if any abnormal behavior is observed and report
the incident to superiors or the person in charge of maintenance, and take appropriate
action. The "It's moving. That's OK" attitude can cause not only a stop in production due
WARNING to failure but serious injury.
When verifying operation after remedial measures have been taken to deal with the
occurrence of fault, refrain from conducting any operations—such as conducting
low-speed playback to verify operation—while an operator is still inside the safety fence
WARNING until it is confirmed that the fault has indeed been remedied. What will happen in this kind
of situation cannot be reliably predicted so other fault may occur or unforeseen accidents
may result.
1-9
1.1.7 Brake Positive Release

If the operators are pinched in the manipulator, brake positive release is possible to operate it
manually. For details of the procedures, refer to “Controller maintenance”.
1.1.8 Movement, alienation and selling of robot system
Hand over all manuals and documents received when purchasing the robot system to the
new owner when moving, alienating or selling a robot system. In particular, if the robot
system is to be moved, transferred or sold overseas, the user is responsible for preparing
CAUTION and supplying the instruction manuals in the appropriate language, amending the
language used for the labels and displays and complying with the laws of the country
concerned. Accidents may occur if the new robot system owner (operator) operates the
robot system incorrectly or performs unsafe work tasks due to not receiving and reading
the Operating Instructions.
When the robot system is moved, transferred or sold (either in the country or overseas) by
the user, whatever was agreed upon at the time of the robot system's initial sale inclusive
of the safety-related items is not transferable to the new owner unless a special
CAUTION agreement has been concluded.
The user must conclude a new agreement with the new owner.
1.1.9 Storage of robot system
For storing a robot system, following ambient conditions shall be met.
1) Storage temperature：0℃～50℃
CAUTION （For long-term storage, 25℃±10℃ are recommended to maintain the reliability.）
2) Storage humidity：20％～85％（Non condensing）
3) There shall be little dirt, dust, lampblack, and water.
4) There shall be no flammable or corrosive liquids and gases.
5) The robot system must not receive any shocks or vibrations.
1.1.10 Disposition of Robot system
Do not disassemble, heat or burn batteries used in the controller and manipulator as they
may catch fire, burst or burn.
CAUTION
Do not disassemble the controller in detail smaller than PCBs or units. Sharp edges or
electric wire of small disassembled pieces may cause injury.
CAUTION
Do not disassemble wire harnesses or robot system external wiring further than
disconnecting wiring from connectors or terminal blocks. Disassembled pieces, eg.
CAUTION Semiconductors etc., may cause injury to hands or eyes.
1-10
Use extreme care when scrapping so as to avoid accidents and injury such as pinching
hands or fingers.
CAUTION
Discard scrapped items safely to avoid injury.

CAUTION
Cautions about Batteries

1. The replacement of the batteries should be done in principle by a trained technician.
2. Do not use the batteries except the specified use.
CAUTION 3.
4.
DO NOT recharge the battery.
Do not heat, disassemble, deform, solder and dispose the battery in fire.
5. Do not drop, hit, throw, or give any shock to the battery.
6. Do not put either plus terminal and the minus one oppositely.
7. Do not connect (+) and (-) of the battery.
8. Keep batteries out of reach of babies and little children. If battery is swallowed,
immediately consult a doctor.
9. A leaking or badly smelling battery should be discarded immediately. The leaking
electrolyte may corrode metal parts.
10. If the liquid of the batteries touches the eyes, the eyes may be injured. Do not rub the
eyes but flush the eyes amply with clean water such as city water and then receive
medical treatment without delay.
11. Remove the used batteries immediately.
12. At disposal of the batteries, insulate the terminal parts with tape or the like.
13. Dispose of the used battery according to your domestic regulations.
Dispose of a USB memory according to your domestic regulations.

CAUTION
1-11
1.1.11 Labels and marks on manipulator and controller

Supplementary explanation is made below concerning the labels and warning plates attached
to the manipulator and the controller.
This label is pasted around the primary power supply inlet

and the step-down transformer case cover of the robot
controller, and the connectors of control cables of the
manipulator.
This mark indicates the power supply part.
In the controller, a primary power voltage (AC 200V to AC 480V) exists, which may
cause serious electrocution. Turn off the power at both the controller breaker and the
WARNING power distribution panel when doing maintenance.
Motor power and detector unit power is supplied to connectors and terminal blocks under
various connector covers on the manipulator mark.
Do not touch connectors or terminal blocks directly or indirectly with conductive items
WARNING with mains power supplied, as electrocution may occur. If connectors or terminal blocks
are removed with mains power on, electric shock or malfunction of the manipulator may
result. Turn off mains power on the controller when performing any maintenance.
This label indicates a high voltage. Use caution when

touching units carrying this label. Electrically charged parts
in the controller exist even after the mains power is turned
off. Therefore it is very dangerous (i.e. electric shock) to
touch them too soon after turning off the mains power.
or
1.通電中は本装置内部の部品に触れないでください。
2.設置及び点検時には一次側の電源を遮断してくだ
さい。
3.充電部がありますので、電源を遮断した後５分間
は本装置内部の部品に触れないでください。
1.Do not touch live electrical parts.

2.Disconnect all power before installing or
servicing.
3.Multiple sources of voltage may exist inside
this enclosure.
Wait 5 minutes after turning off the mains power before working inside the controller.
Do not work with wet hands otherwise electrocution may result.
If parts get wet, it may lead to a malfunction or failure.
DANGER
1-12
Under a cover displaying this mark on the controller, a primary power voltage (AC
200V to AC 480V) exists, which may cause serious electrocution. Turn off the power at
both the controller breaker and the power distribution panel when doing maintenance
WARNING requiring the removal of any of these covers.
Replace units and/or parts according to procedures given in the instruction manuals.
Incorrect removal and installation may result in a malfunction, failure or accident.
CAUTION
This mark indicates hot parts on the manipulator.
Check that the part bearing this mark is not hot before touching it. Carelessly touching
labeled hot parts may result in serious burns.
CAUTION
These marks indicate an area where operators may get

caught by the manipulator.
WARNING
警　告
可動部付近は非常
に危険です。
警　告
●
WARNING
●
Places bearing this mark should never be touched.

Brakes can be released not only during teaching but also while the motors are off.
Take adequate steps to prevent your hands or other parts of your body from being
CAUTION pinched when these areas are touched during maintenance work, etc.
1-13
This mark indicates the warning of the manipulator’s work

area.
Do not enter inside the manipulator’s work area while the power is still on.
Approaching the manipulator while it is moving may result in fatal bodily injury.
WARNING
This label indicates that manipulator arms may fall when

motors are removed from the manipulator.
Never put yourself under the arm when removing a motor. The arm driven by the motor
being removed will drop if not restrained.
CAUTION
Unless the arm is supported properly, it will drop if the motor is removed.
Before removing the motor, make absolutely sure that the arm is supported properly.
Do not rely on the positioning pin alone to secure the arm since it may be inserted
WARNING incorrectly or inserted only half way in. Use a wooden block, sling or other means to
support the arm properly before attempting to remove the motor. The manipulator arm
must NOT be supported by a person's hand.
This label warns of stored energy. Therefore use caution

when disassembling the robot units labeled as such.
Never disassemble the parts bearing this mark, even when disassembling the robot
system for maintenance. Disassembly of these parts may cause fatal or serious
WARNING accidents.
1-14
This label indicates that robot arms may fall when stoppers
are removed from the robot.
Do not operate the robot without mechanical stoppers. Such an operation may cause
damage to the peripheral equipments or result serious injury or death.
WARNING
This label indicates covers where motor plug is protected.

(only for available robot and axis)
Do not get on the part where this mark is attached, and work while putting strong power.
There is a possibility that the cover and the plug are damaged.
WARNING
1-15
1.2 To ensure the safety of arc welding

1.2.1 Preventing electric shock accidents
Before commencing the welding work, read through, familiarize yourself with, understand and
comply with the related safety regulations and basic checkpoints below in addition to the
instructions given in the manual of the welding power supply.
Follow the instructions below in order to avoid electric shock accidents.
Do not touch any of the electrically charged areas.

If you touch any of the electrically charged areas, you may receive a fatal shock
WARNING or suffer burns.
(1) Do not touch any of the electrically charged areas.
(2) The casing and base metal of the welding power supply and the jigs which are electrically
connected to the base metal must be grounded by a qualified electrician in accordance with
the relevant laws and regulations (technical standards for electrical apparatus).
(3) Before undertaking installation, inspection, maintenance or other such work, be absolutely
sure to turn off all the incoming power supplies. Even when the incoming power supplies have
been turned off, the capacitors and other components may remain charged. After having
turned off the power, therefore, wait 5 minutes, and then proceed with the work.
(4) Wear dry insulated gloves and work overalls at all times. Never wear gloves or work overalls
which are torn or wet.
(5) Do not use any connecting cables which have an insufficient capacity, which are damaged or
whose conductors are now exposed.
(6) Securely tighten up the areas where the cables have been connected, and insulate them in
such a way that they cannot easily be touched.
(7) Do not use the welder with its casing or covers removed.
(8) Pay sufficient attention to where you will be stepping before undertaking the work. Do not
perform any work wherever your footing is unstable or high above the ground (higher than 2
meters).
(9) Perform the inspections and maintenance regularly, and repair any damaged parts or areas
before using them.
(10) Be absolutely sure to keep the incoming power of equipment which is not in use turned off.
1-16
1.2.2 Protection from fumes and gases given off during welding
Ensure that operators and other personnel follow the instructions below in order to protect
themselves from the fumes and gases which are given off during welding.
・ Provide adequate ventilation and, wherever so required, wear a protective

mask, etc.
WARNING FUMES AND GASES can be hazardous to your health.
When welding work is performed in confined spaces, a deficiency of
oxygen may arise, and you may run the risk of suffocation.
(1) Keep your face as far away from the fumes as possible during welding and do as much as you
can to refrain from inhaling them.
(2) To prevent gas poisoning and suffocation, ventilates the local area sufficiently or use breathing
apparatus stipulated by the relevant laws and regulations (Industrial Safety and Health Law,
and the regulations for preventing dust generation).
(3) To prevent dust disorder and/or poisoning by fume, use the kind of local exhaust ventilation or
breathing apparatus stipulated by the relevant laws and regulations (Industrial Safety and
Health Law, and the regulations for preventing dust generation).
(4) The heavier gas than the air such as carbon dioxide or argon gas may remain at the bottom
when the welding work is done in the bottom of tank, boiler or hold. Adequate ventilation or
breathing apparatus should be provided to prevent oxygen deficiency disease in such a place.
(5) When welding work is to be performed in confined spaces, be absolutely sure to provide
adequate ventilation or wear breathing apparatus and ensure that the work is monitored in the
presence of a trained observer.
(6) Do not perform welding work near degreasing, cleaning or spraying work. If it is performed in
the vicinity of such work, noxious gases may be generated.
(7) If covered steel sheets are to be welded, provide adequate ventilation or wear breathing
apparatus since noxious fumes and gases will be generated.
(8) Read and familiarize yourself with the warning labels on all of the containers relating to the
welding materials, and comply with the instructions given.
(9) Prior to use, be absolutely sure to look over and understand the instruction manual and the
test data relating to the materials.
1-17
1.2.3 Protection from the arc light, spatters and slugs generated during welding
Ensure that instructions below are followed in order to protect the eyes and skin of the
operators and other personnel from the arc light, scattering spatters and slugs which are
generated during welding and in order to protect their ears from the noise.
• Install a light-shielding wall in the area where arcs occur.

Arc light may lead to inflammation of the eyes and/ or burning of the skin.
WARNING • Wear the appropriate clothing and protective gear to protect your eyes, ears
and skin.
The spatter and slag which are scattered around are harmful to the eyes
and cause burns on the skin.
Noise can cause hearing problems.
(1) When performing welding work or observing the welding, wear protective goggles with a high
light-filtering capability or the kind of protective face mask designed for welding.
(2) To protect your eyes from spatter and slag, wear protective goggles.
(3) When performing welding work, wear protective gear such as the kind of protective leather
gloves designed for welding, work overalls with long sleeves, leg coverings, and a leather
apron which are appropriate for the purpose at hand.
(4) Take steps to install a protective curtain in the vicinity of the welding work area so that the
operator and other personnel will not have their eyes exposed to the arc light.
(5) Wear protective goggles at all times in the vicinity of the welding work area.
(6) Where there is loud noise, use ear protectors.
1-18
1.2.4 Preventing fire- and explosion-related accidents caused by the base metal, spatter,
slag or arc sparks
Ensure that the instructions below are followed in order to avoid fire- and explosion-related
accidents and injury to operators caused by the base metal which will still be hot immediately after
welding or by spatter, slag and arc sparks.
・ Do not place any ignitable or inflammable objects in the vicinity of the

welding work.
Spatters and/or the base metal which will still be hot immediately after
WARNING welding may cause fire.
The occurrence of arc on the container of inflammable material such as
gasoline may cause explosion.
・ Securely tighten up all areas where the cables have been connected, and
insulate them.
Imperfect connections of the cables and/or current path on the workpiece
may cause fire by heating of electricity.
(1) Remove inflammable or ignitable objects from the welding work area so that the spatter which
is scattered around will not come into contact with them. If they cannot be removed, place
non-combustible covers over the inflammable objects.
(2) Do not use inflammable gases in the vicinity of the welding work area.
(3) Do not allow the base metal, jigs, etc. which will still be hot immediately after welding to touch
any work gloves, cloth or other objects that will catch fire easily. Otherwise, not only you may
burn yourself but also a fire may be caused as well.
(4) When performing welding work on the ceilings, floors, walls, etc. of large structures, remove all
ignitable and inflammable objects on the hidden side of the base metal as well.
(5) Do not perform any welding work on top of wood, cloth or other objects that catch fire easily.
(6) Do not bring the base metal which will still be hot immediately after welding near inflammable
objects.
(7) Do not attempt to weld gas pipes with gases sealed inside or airtight tanks, pipes, etc. since
they may rupture in the process.
(8) Securely tighten up all areas where the cables have been connected, and insulate them.
(9) Connect the cables on the base metal side as close to where the workpiece will be welded as
possible.
(10) Take fire precautions in advance by placing fire extinguishers in the vicinity of the welding
work area and ensuring that the operators know exactly how to use them.
(11) At all times observe the scene to ensure that nothing has caught on fire.
1-19
1.2.5 Preventing gas cylinder from toppling over or rupturing and protecting gas flow
regulators from overheating, impact, etc.
Ensure that the instructions below are followed to prevent gas cylinders from toppling over or
rupturing and to protect gas flow regulators from overheating, impact, etc.
・ Secure the gas cylinders to a stand which has been specially constructed to
accommodate them.
When a gas cylinder topples over, it may result in bodily injury.
WARNING
・ Install the gas cylinders at a distance from the welding arcs and other
welding-related equipment.
Since gas cylinders contain gas under high pressure, if they are
mishandled, the high-pressure gas may burst forth, possibly resulting in
bodily injury.
・ Use a proper gas flow regulators for a high-pressure gas cylinder.
Using an improper gas flow regulator may cause an explosion, possibly
resulting in bodily injury.
(1) For the guidelines on handling gas cylinders, comply with the applicable laws and regulations
and with the internal standards established at the user's company.
(2) As the gas flow regulators, use ones supplied by us as accessories or ones recommended by
us.
(3) Before using a gas flow regulator, be absolutely sure to read through its operating instructions,
and observe the precautions given.
(4) Do not expose gas cylinders to high temperatures.
(5) Secure the gas cylinders to a stand specially constructed to accommodate them by using
insulated chains or straps, etc. which are equivalent to chains so that they do not fall down.
(6) Install the gas cylinders at a distance from passageways or aisles used by work personnel and
vehicles.
(7) When a valve on a gas cylinder is to be opened, keep your face away from the gas outlet.
(8) When a gas cylinder is not going to be used, be absolutely sure to close its valve and attach its
protective cap.
(9) Do not apply the welding torch to a gas cylinder or allow the electrodes to touch a gas cylinder.
(10) Check and repairs for a gas flow regulator shall be performed periodically and before
operating.
1-20
1.3 Precautions for undertaking work inside the manipulator’s work area
1.3 Precautions for undertaking work inside the

manipulator’s work area
Ensure that all the personnel involved in working inside the manipulator’s work area will wear the following
protective gear.
• Do not enter inside the manipulator’s work area while the power is still on.
Approaching the manipulator while it is moving may result in fatal bodily injury.
WARNING
(1) Inside the manipulator’s work area, wear a protective helmet at all times.
(2) Inside the manipulator’s work area, wear protective goggles with the proper light-shielding glass at all times.
(3) While power is supplied to it, a welder generates magnetic fields around it, and these will adversely affect
the operation of a pacemaker.
Therefore, persons fitted with a pacemaker should not approach a welder while it is operating or the
welding work area unless they are permitted to do so by their physicians.
(4) Before entering the manipulator’s work area or welding work area, be absolutely sure to turn off the
incoming power of the robot control unit and welder.
(5) Follow the instructions below to safeguard against the effects of the electromagnetic noise which is
generated by the welding arcs.
(a) Install precision instruments, etc. at a distance from the welding arcs.
(b) Use one incoming power supply for the welder and another for the precision instruments, etc.
(6) Since touching a rotating part inadvertently can result in injury, be absolutely sure to follow the instructions
below.
• Do not allow your hands, fingers, hair or articles of clothing, etc. to come too
close to the rotating parts.
If you bring your hands, fingers, hair or articles of clothing, etc. too close to a
WARNING rotating part such as the feed roll of a wire feeder, they may become caught by
or tangled up in the rotating part, possibly resulting in injury.
If you bring your hands, fingers, hair or articles of clothing, etc. too close to a
rotating part of the cooling fan, they may become caught by or tangled up in the
rotating part, possibly resulting in injury.
(7) When using with welding specifications, be sure to follow the safety precautions in the welding equipment
and welding gun instruction manuals.
1-21
1.3 Precautions for undertaking work inside the manipulator’s work area
NOTE
1-22
Chapter 2 Transportation and
Installation
This chapter describes the procedures to be followed in terms of transportation,

installation, etc. when the robot is delivered. For further details of transporting and
installing the manipulator, refer to the MANIPULATOR MANUAL of the particular
robot model concerned.
2.1 From the installation work to the teaching work............................................. 2-1

2.2 Transportation................................................................................................ 2-2
2.2.1 Manipulator ............................................................................................ 2-2
2.2.2 Controller ............................................................................................ 2-2
2.3 Robot Installation ........................................................................................... 2-4
2.4 Installation of robot controller......................................................................... 2-4
2.4.1Robot controller installation location and environment ................................ 2-4
2.4.2Install dimensions of robot controller ........................................................... 2-4
2.4.3Installation place of robot controller............................................................. 2-5
2.4.4Install method of robot controller ................................................................. 2-6
2.1 From the installation work to the teaching work
2.1 From the installation work to the teaching work

The outline of the installation work (From the robot installation to the start of the teaching work) is shown as
below. Perform this installation work by following the flow chart shown as below.
START
Install the manipulator and the robot

controller.
Chapter 2
For details of the manipulator, refer
Transportation and Installation to the respective maintenance
manuals ("MANIPULATOR MANUAL").
Chapter 3 Connect control cables, primary power

Connections cable, I/O signal lines etc.
Turn ON the power.

Attach the tool onto the robot wrist, and
then perform the setup procedure e.g.
tool constant settings etc. Carefully read
Chapter 4 the respective instructions to do those
Setup works properly.
Because “4.1 How to read "Chapter
4 Setup"” includes the outline of the all
works, it is recommended to read the
section at the beginning.
These chapters describe the setup

works that are exclusive to the spot
welding application and the arc welding
application. Because these chapters
Chapter 5 Spot welding setup mention only basic items, please refer to
Chapter 6 Arc welding setup the manuals listed below for more
details.
“Application manual : Spot welding”,

“Application manual : Arc welding”
This is a preparation work for automatic

Chapter 7
operation. (Designation of the playback
Preparations for auto operation method, home position registration etc.)
END
2-1
2.2 Transportation
2.2 Transportation
Ensure that the manipulator and robot controller is moved into position by individuals
who have acquired the permits or licenses needed for carrying out slinging work,
operating cranes, driving forklift trucks, etc.
WARNING Adopt handling procedures which are commensurate with the weights described in
each instruction manual of the manipulator or robot controller.
When hoisting the manipulator and/or the controller, follow the method set forth in
this manual or in other instruction manuals. Moving the robot into position using a
method not specified by the manufacturer may cause the robot to topple over or fall,
WARNING which may lead to accidents.
Take more than enough care to ensure that the wiring is not damaged during the
moving and installation processes. After having positioned the units, take protective
measures such as providing protective covers to ensure that the wiring will not be
WARNING damaged by the operators and other individuals or by the forklift trucks.
2.2.1 Manipulator
Transportation procedure depends on the type of manipulator.
For details, refer to each according instruction manual “MANIPULATOR”.
2.2.2 Controller
Transfer the controller to its installation place by use of a crane, a forklift, or a hand
lifter. When to transfer it by use of a crane, use eye bolts (at 2 portions). And when to
WARNING use a forklift or a hand lifter, transfer the controller so that it should not fall down.
The weight of the controller is as shown below.
For NB4 / NV6 / NB4L / NV6L / NB15 / NV20 / NH5 / SRA / SRA-H / LP
WARNING standard single mechanism : Approx. 62 kg
Confirm the actual mass by the label pasted on the robot controller because the
mass may vary under other specifications (e.g. transformer specification).
When working, put on protective gears such as a helmet, safety shoes and so forth,
and carry out the work while wearing safe working clothes appropriate for the work.
Printed boards and other precision devices are used in the controller; therefore do
not give any impact during transfer. When hoisting the controller using a crane, take
WARNING care that none of the parts on the controller will be damaged by the wires.
Use the wires and shackles which satisfy the following strength when transporting the
robot controller for the standard single manipulator.
CAUTION Hanging wires

Withstand load : 450 kg or higher / Length : 1.5 m or longer
Shackles
0.9 t or higher / JIS B2801
2-2
2.2 Transportation
Rope to fix robot Wooden Protection pad
Folklift
Use shackles to affix the wire rope to Wire rope

the eye-bolt securely Withstand load
450 kg or more
Provide the following kind of shackles Length:
Withstand load : 0.9 t 1.5 m or more
JIS B2801
Fig. 2.2.1 Controller transportation method
2-3
2.3 Robot Installation
2.3 Robot Installation

The locations in which the manipulator is installed and the method used to install it are critical for ensuring that
the functions of the robot will be maintained.
The ambient atmosphere in the installation location not only affects the lifespan estimation of the mechanisms
but it also has a bearing on safety.
To ensure safety, special attention must be paid to the environmental conditions, the installation method and
dimensions of the manipulator and its foundation.
For details, refer to according instruction manual “MANIPULATOR MANUAL”. Follow all the conditions after
careful reading.
2.4 Installation of robot controller
2.4.1 Robot controller installation location and environment

Install the robot controller in a location that satisfies all the following conditions.
(1) A location not exposed to direct sunlight, with an ambient temperature of 0 to 45 degrees
Celsius throughout the year.
(2) A location with an ambient relative humidity of 20 to 80% and no condensation.
(3) A location with minimal amounts of dust, dirt, oily vapors, water, etc.
(4) A location with no flammable or corrosive liquids or gases, etc.
(5) A location where the maximum shock or vibration transmitted to the controller by the
2
operation of other machines in the area is 0.5 G (4.9 m/sec ) or less.
(6) A location with no major sources of electrical noise (plasma, high frequency power
sources, etc.).
2.4.2 Install dimensions of robot controller

Although robot controller does not have any of the moving parts like the manipulator, it must still
be secured at its installation location without fail in order to prevent it from falling when it has been
installed in a high place or from toppling over when it has been installed on the floor.
Fig. 2.4.1 Dimensions for robot controller installation
2-4
2.4.3 Installation place of robot controller

(1) Be sure to install a guarding fence around manipulators and other devices (positioners, etc.)
as shown in the figure below, to prevent people from inadvertently going near them.
Be sure to install robot controllers, welders, and peripheral devices such as the operating
box, teach pendant and start box (option) outside the guarding fence.
DANGER
1 m or more
1 m or more
1 m or more Door
1 m or more
Operation box
Teach pendant
Robot controller Welding power supply
Fig. 2.4.2 Example of guarding fence installation

(2) When installing the controller, leave a clearance of at least 100 mm between the controller and
the wall behind it in order to ensure proper ventilation inside the robot controller.
(3) To install a robot controller and welding power supply, etc. on a place two or more meters in
height such as a frame base, a foothold as described in Fig. 2.4.3 is required so that
adjustment and maintenance, etc. can be performed.
Fig. 2.4.3 Installation of robot controller
(4) A robot controller has a through-hole for an external connection cable on its right side and back
side.
To install a robot controller, secure a space of 400 mm at least for external connection cable.
(5) Install the controller so that the height from the working floor to the breaker handle is between
0.6 m and 1.9 m.
2-5
2.4.4 Install method of robot controller

When the robot controller is to be installed on the floor, first fit M12 concrete anchors and
secure the support channels on the bottom of the controller to the anchor bolts using four M12
lock nuts (M12) as shown in Fig. 2.4.4. (Tightening torque: 42.2 N•m (431 kgf•cm))
If the floor is not strong enough, embed J-shaped anchor bolts in the floor and secure the robot
controller as shown in Fig. 2.4.4.
Fig. 2.4.4 Concerning the robot controller installation method
After the robot controller has been installed, shut the door completely, and check that the door
has been locked by the keys provided for this purpose. Dirt, dust and other foreign matter may
find their way inside the robot controller if its door is not completely shut, possibly causing it to fail.
Also lock the circuit breaker of the controller shown in Fig. 2.4.5 using the key provided for this
purpose. Be absolutely sure to entrust the safekeeping of the key for the circuit breaker padlock to
a specially designated person or the person in charge of safety management. (The padlock is to
be provided by the user. Padlock dimensions:φ4-5)
Fig. 2.4.5 Concerning the circuit breaker lock
2-6
Chapter 3 Connections
This chapter describes how to connect the robot body to the controller, teach
pendant and power supply and how to perform the I/O connections with the
peripheral devices.
3.1 Summary of Connection Work to Robot Controller ............................................. 3-1

3.2 Precautions for Cable connections ..................................................................... 3-2
3.3 Manipulator connection ...................................................................................... 3-3
3.3.1 NB4 / NV6 / NB4L / NV6L / NB15 / NV20 / NH5 connection........................ 3-3
3.3.2 NV50 / NV166 / NV210 connection ............................................................. 3-9
3.3.3 SRA/MC/MR/LP/SC/ST/ST210TP/VS connection ..................................... 3-14
3.4 Teach pendant connection................................................................................ 3-15
3.5 Operation box & Starting box connection ......................................................... 3-18
3.5.1 Operation box connection.......................................................................... 3-18
3.5.2 Starting box connection ............................................................................. 3-20
3.6 Installation of Optional board for physical I/O signals ....................................... 3-21
3.6.1 Arc I/F Board Installation ........................................................................... 3-22
3.6.1.1 Overview of the Arc I/F Board .............................................................3-22
3.6.1.2 Installation Position of the Arc I/F Board .............................................3-22
3.6.2 Relay Unit + I/O Board Installation ............................................................ 3-24
3.6.2.1 Overview of the Relay Unit + I/O Board ..............................................3-24
3.6.2.2 Installation position of the Relay Unit + I/O Board...............................3-24
3.6.3 I/O Board Installation ................................................................................. 3-27
3.6.3.1 Overview of the I/O Board...................................................................3-27
3.6.3.2 Dip switch setting of I/O board ............................................................3-27
3.6.3.3 I/O Board Installation Position and Connector Position.......................3-28
3.7 Safety-related signal connections..................................................................... 3-30
3.7.1 Sequence board ........................................................................................ 3-30
3.7.2 Position of the terminal block..................................................................... 3-31
3.7.3 Pin layout of Terminal blocks ..................................................................... 3-32
3.7.4 Electrical specification of input terminal block ........................................... 3-36
3.7.5 Electrical specifications of output terminal block ....................................... 3-36
3.7.6 Connection procedures on input terminal block......................................... 3-37
3.7.6.1 External emergency stop input (TBEX1: 1-2, 3-4)...............................3-37
3.7.6.2 G-STOP input (TBEX1: 5-6, 7-8).........................................................3-37
3.7.6.3 Safety plug input (TBEX1: 9-10, 11-12)...............................................3-38
3.7.6.4 Teach enable switch input (TBEX1: 13-14, 15-16) ..............................3-39
3.7.6.5 Connections when the robot controller is used by itself ......................3-39
3.7.7 Emergency stop output connection (TBEX2 : 1-2, 3-4) ............................. 3-40
3.8 Power connections ........................................................................................... 3-41
3.8.1 Prior to Primary power supply connections ............................................... 3-41
3.8.2 Primary power supply connections ............................................................ 3-42
3.8.3 Grounding.................................................................................................. 3-45
3.9 Signal specifications of Optional Physical I/O board......................................... 3-48

3.9.1 Common items .......................................................................................... 3-48
3.9.1.1 DC24V supplying procedure ...............................................................3-48
3.9.1.2 Electrical specifications of physical input ............................................3-48
3.9.1.3 Electrical specifications of physical output ..........................................3-49
3.9.2 I/O signal specifications of Arc I/F board ................................................... 3-50
3.9.2.1 I/O signal specifications of Arc I/F board .............................................3-50
3.9.2.2 Connections to the Arc I/F Board Input Signals...................................3-51
3.9.2.3 Connections to the Arc I/F Board Output Signals................................3-53
3.9.2.4 Warning lamp connections to Arc I/F board.........................................3-54
3.9.3 I/O signal specifications of Relay unit with I/O board................................. 3-55
3.9.3.1 I/O signal specifications of relay unit ...................................................3-55
3.9.3.2 Connections to Relay Unit Input Signals .............................................3-58
3.9.3.3 Connections to Relay Unit Output Signals ..........................................3-60
3.9.4 I/O signal specifications of I/O board ......................................................... 3-61
3.9.4.1 Input signal connector CNIN of I/O board ...........................................3-61
3.9.4.2 Output signal connector CNOUT of I/O board.....................................3-61
3.9.4.3 Connections to I/O board Input and output Signals (DC24V external power)
3-62
3.9.4.4 Connections to I/O board Input Signals (DC24V external power) .......3-64
3.9.4.5 Connections to the I/O Board Output Signals (DC24V external power)3-65
3.9.4.6 I/O Board I/O Signal Specifications (DC24V internal power)...............3-66
3.9.4.7 Connections to the I/O Board Input Signals (DC24V internal power) ..3-68
3.9.4.8 Connections to the I/O Board Output Signals (DC24V internal power)3-69
3.1 Summary of Connection Work to Robot Controller
3.1 Summary of Connection Work to Robot Controller

Connection work between the robot controller and various devices is as shown below.
Manipulator connections page 3-3 “Manipulator connection”
Connect the manipulator to the robot controller. (Only in case of NB4 / NV6 / NB4L / NV6L /
NB15 / NV20 / NH5 / NV50 / NV166 / NV210)
In case of SRA / MC / MR / LP / SC / ST / ST210TP / VS series etc., normally the cable

connection for the robot controller side is already completed at the timing of the
shipping. Please make the connection only for the backside of the robot (manipulator).
Teach pendant connection page 3-15 “Teach pendant connection”
Connect the teach pendant to the robot controller.
If the teach pendant connection is already done at the timing of the shipping, this step
can be skipped.
Operation box / starting box

page 3-18 “Operation box & Starting box connection”
connections
If required, connect the operation box and starting box to the robot controller.
If you are using an operating panel, there is no need to read this section.
Installation/signal wiring of optional page 3-21 “Installation of Optional board for physical I/O
board for physical I/O signals signals”
If required, install an optional board for general purpose physical input/output signals.
The physical I/O can be used to connect your external devices to the robot controller.
To check the specifications of the physical I/O signals, see page 3-40 "Signal specifications of
Optional Physical I/O board”.
If you are using the Fieldbus functions (e.g. DeviceNet / PROFINET / CC-Link, etc.),
please refer to their respective optional instruction manuals.
Safety-related signal connections page 3-30 "Safety-related signal connections"
Connect safety-related signals such as emergency stop and safety plugs. Always connect
these, as they are important safety measures used when abnormalities occur or in
emergencies by operators during teaching work.
Primary power supply connection page 3-41 “Power connections”
Connect the robot controller to your primary power supply equipment.
Although all of these works are important, please pay special attention when performing
the “Safety-related signal connection”. If the connections and the operations for those
WARNING signals are not done correctly, serious injury or death may result.
3-1
3.2 Precautions for Cable connections
3.2 Precautions for Cable connections
Notes on connection
1. Before connecting cables to the robot controller, be sure to turn OFF the switch on the
WARNING primary switchboard and breaker inside the robot controller, and then check that the
voltage is not impressed.
2. Be sure to firmly tighten the joint part (connector and terminal) of cables and hoses.
3. Do not place anything on cables.
4. Do not cross cables each other.
5. Do not lay cables under the welding power supply.
6. Lay out the welding cable and other control cables separately, not binding together.
7. To draw cables in, refer to the directions in the following page and after.
8. After connecting the cables to the robot controller, close the door completely, and lock
the door key. If the door is not completely closed, dust or dirt will enter the robot
controller, which may cause breakdown.
How to open the robot controller

1 Unlock the breaker.
2 Release the door key by 2 places on top and bottom using an attachment key.
3 Turn the breaker handle to “Open Reset”, and open the door. Then, the primary power of
the robot controller is shut off.
If compelled to open the robot controller door with the power ON for inspection etc. in the event
of emergency, follow the instructions.
1 Release the door key by two places on top and bottom using an attachment key.
2 Turn the part indicated as “Release” to the arrow direction below using a Phillips
screwdriver, but not turning the breaker handle. Then, the door is opened with the power
ON.
Be absolutely sure NOT to expose the controller inside to direct sunlight, a searchlight or
other strong lights before turning on the primary power supply while the controller door is
left open to enable maintenance or other work to be performed.
WARNING Failure to adhere to the precautions may cause the robot and/or controller to fail or operate
in error.
1. Even if the breaker of this unit is OFF, voltage is still impressed to the primary side of
breaker. Before opening the door for inspection etc., shut off the power source first.
2. There are many high-voltage parts inside the robot controller. Do not touch them.
WARNING Otherwise, you may get an electric shock. If compelled to open the door with the
power ON in the event of emergency, take special care that you never touch any
parts inside.
3-2
3.3 Manipulator connection
3.3.1 NB4 / NV6 / NB4L / NV6L / NB15 / NV20 / NH5 connection
Electric shock may cause serious injury or death.

Wiring work should be done after turning off the primary power supply and circuit breaker
on the controller.
WARNING
The cable that connects the manipulator and controller is called “Control cable”. The connection
ports on each manipulator and robot controller (connector) and the control cables are both
indicated by the corresponding connector name. Follow Fig. 3.3.1 to properly connect the cable
by each corresponding name. Some cables are provided with “male” connector, and the others
“female” connector of which key grooves are different each other. This is how wrong connection
can be avoided. However still, if forcing to insert into a wrong port, it will get broken.
Connection on Manipulator Side (NB4 / NV6 / NB4L / NV6L / NB15 / NV20 / NH5)
Control cables 1 & 3
CN2:Connect Control cable 3

CN1:Connect Control cable 1
Rear connector plate
Fig. 3.3.1 Control cable 1 and 3:Manipulator side (NB4 / NV6 / NB4L / NV6L / NB15 / NV20 / NH5)
3-3
Connection on Robot Controller Side (NB4 / NV6 / NB4L / NV6L / NB15 / NV20 / NH5)

WARNING on the controller.
Connect the connectors (control cables 1 and 3), which are the opposite ones from the
manipulator side that have already been connected to the robot, to the controller. For details on
the cable service entrance and connector positions, see Fig. 3.3.3.
1 Turn off the primary power supply and circuit breaker on the controller.
2 As shown in Fig. 3.3.2, remove the connector that is connected to the IPM drive unit, and
remove the fixing screws. The connectors to remove from the IPM drive unit are shown
in Table 3.3.1.
IPM Drive Unit

CNVP CNSV CNMS
IPM Drive Unit

fixing screw
CNRST
CNFAN
IPM Drive Unit

fixing screw
CNR CNCOM
< Front view (inside) >

Fig. 3.3.2 Connection of Control cables 1 and 3: Robot controller side (IPM drive unit removal)
Table 3.3.1 Connectors to Detach

Connector Destination
CNCOM CPU board
CNSV Sequence board
CNVP Multi power supply unit
CNMS Power unit
CNRST Power unit
CNFAN Cooling fan (Heat sink)
CNR Regenerative resistance
3-4
3 Pull the IPM drive unit out 200mm from the front side.
4 Remove the maintenance cover shown in Fig. 3.3.3 Pull in control cable 1 and control
cable 3 through the cable service entrance shown in Fig. 3.3.3 on the back of the robot
controller.
Fig. 3.3.3 Connection of Control cables 1 and 3: Robot Controller side (Pull cables through)
5 Fix the shield section of control cable 1 and control cable 3 to the shield fixing fixtures on
the right side of the service entrance as shown in Fig. 3.3.4, and fix the cable flange in
place.
Also, connect the ground wire of control cable 1 to the ground terminal on the right side
of the service entrance as shown in Fig. 3.3.4.
Control cable 1
(Motor cable)
Shield fixing fixture

Cable flange
Grounding wire
Shield ground
Control cable 3
(Encoder cable)
Cable
flange
Fig. 3.3.4 Connection of Control cables 1 and 3: Robot controller side (shield and ground connections)
3-5
6 Wire the control cables 1 & 3 and connect each connector to the corresponding one on
the IPM drive unit referring to Fig. 3.3.5 for B/V type manipulator or Fig. 3.3.6 for H type
manipulator.
"A"
Pull out the IPM drive unit

200mm.
Pass through the cable duct.

"A" (Control cable 1)
Fix using the clamp on the outer side
of the cable duct.(Control cable 3)
CNBK2 CNP4A CNP5A CNP6A
CNBK1
Pull out the

IPM drive
unit 200mm. CNEC2 CNEC1
CNP2B
CNP3A CNP2A CNP1A
control cable 1
(Motor cable)
IPM Drive Unit
control cable 3
(Encoder cable)
Power unit
< View "A"-"A" (Right inside view) >

Fig. 3.3.5 Connection of Control cables 1 and 3: Robot controller side (Wiring & Connections) (B/V Type)
3-6
"A"
Pull out the IPM drive unit

200mm.
Pass through the cable duct.

"A" (Control cable 1)
Fix using the clamp on the outer side
of the cable duct.(Control cable 3)
CNBK2 CNP4A CNP5A CNP6A
CNBK1
Pull out the

IPM drive
unit 200mm. CNEC2 CNEC1
CNP3A CNP2A CNP1A

IPM drive unit
Control cable 1
CNP2A CNP2B (Motor cable)
Connect the connectors

CNP2A and CNP2B
of the control cable 1
to the corresponding connectors
of the branch cable respectively. Control cable 3
(Encoder cable)
Power unit
< View "A"-"A" (Right inside view) >
Fig. 3.3.6 Connection of Control cables 1 and 3: Robot controller side (Wiring & Connections) (H Type)
3-7
7 After connecting each connector, push the IPM drive unit back to its original position as
shown in Fig. 3.3.7, and tighten the two screws.
At this time, be sure that the cable does not catch on the edge of the case.
Return the IPM drive unit to its original location.

"A"
Control cable 1
(Motor cable)
Control cable 3
(Encoder cable)
"A"
< Front view (inside) > < View"A"-"A" (Right inside view) >
Fig. 3.3.7 Connection of Control cables 1 and 3: Robot controller side (drive unit installation)
8 Reconnect the cable connectors removed in 2 to the original connections of the IPM
drive unit.
9 To continue connecting the teach pendant, proceed to section 3.4.
If the teach pendant will not be connected, attach the maintenance cover removed in 4.
1. Be sure to arrange the control cable 3 away from the primary power cable and the
power cable that is connected with Arc welding power supply.
2. Since one of the wire harnesses (control cable 3) is a cable to be used in non-moving
CAUTION areas, do not use it in moving or bending areas inside the cable bears of a slider, etc.
If it is to be used in a moving area, consult with us.
After the cables have been connected to the controller, close the door completely, and lock
the door key.. If the door is not completely closed, dirt, dust and other foreign matter may
enter inside the controller, possibly causing malfunctions.
CAUTION
3-8
3.3.2 NV50 / NV166 / NV210 connection

on the controller.
WARNING
The installation positions (connectors) for the manipulator and robot controller, and wire
harnesses (control cable) have the connector names written on. Follow Fig. 3.3.8, and connect
each connector and harness correctly with the connectors/harnesses of the same name. There
are "male” and “female” cable connectors, which have different key seats. This structure is used to
prevent mistaken connections, so forcing connectors together will cause damage. Be careful
when making connections.
Connections on manipulator side
Wire harness
(Control cable)
Robot controller side

connection
Manipulator side
connection
Rear of manipulator CNR010

BJ1BOX (Application）
CNR04 CNR4
CNR02 CNR2
CNR01 CNR1
Manipulator Robot controller
Fig. 3.3.8 Connection of Wire harness (NV50 / NV166 / NV210)
3-9

on the controller.
WARNING
Connect the opposite side of the control cable that is connected to the manipulator to the robot
controller.
1 Turn off the breaker of the robot controller and the supply of primary-side power.
2 As shown in Fig. 3.3.9, remove the connector that is connected to the IPM drive unit, and
remove the fixing screws. The connectors to remove from the IPM drive unit are shown
in Table 3.3.2.
IPM Drive Unit

CNVP CNSV CNMS
IPM Drive Unit

fixing screw
CNRST
CNFAN
IPM Drive Unit

fixing screw
CNR CNCOM

Fig. 3.3.9 Connection of control cables 1, 2 and 3:
Robot controller side (IPM drive unit removal)
Table 3.3.2 Connectors to Detach

Connector Destination
CNCOM CPU board
CNSV Sequence board
CNVP Multi power supply unit
CNMS Power unit
CNRST Power unit
CNFAN Cooling fan (Heat sink)
CNR Regenerative resistance
3-10
3 Pull the IPM drive unit out 200mm from the front side.
4 Remove the maintenance cover shown in Fig. 3.3.10. Pull control cables 1, 2 and 3
through the inlet on the rear panel of the robot controller.
Control cable 1 (CNR1)

(Motor cable)
inlet

(Motor cable)
inlet

(Encoder cable)
inlet
To manipulator Remove the maintenance cover.
Fig. 3.3.10 Connection of control cables 1, 2 and 3: Robot controller side

(pulling through the cables)
5 Connect the ground wires of control cable1 and control cable 2 to the ground terminal on
the right side of the inlet as shown in Fig. 3.3.11.

(Motor cable)
Cable flange
CNR1 G Control cable 2 (CNR2)
CNR1 ECE (Motor cable)
CNR2 G
CNR2 ECE
Cable flange
Control cable 3
(CNR4)
(Encoder cable)
Cable
flange
Fig. 3.3.11 Connection of control cables 1, 2 and 3: Robot controller side (ground connection)
3-11
6 As shown in Fig. 3.3.12, lay out the cables and connect them to the connectors.
For the laying out of control cable 3 and the connection of CNEC1 and CNEC2, refer to
the procedure after the following step.
"A"
Pull the IPM drive unit 200 mm.
"A"
CNBK2 CNP4A CNP5A CNP6A Pass through the cable duct.

CNP4B CNP5B CNP6B - Control cable 1 (CNR1) (Motor cable)
- Control cable 2 (CNR2) (Motor cable)
CNBK1
CNP1A CNP2A CNP3A

CNP1B CNP2B CNP3B
Pull out the

IPM drive unit Refer to Fig. 3.3.13.
200 mm.
CNEC2 CNEC1
CNP3B CNP2B CNP1B

CNP3A CNP2A CNP1A
CNP3B CNP2B CNP1B
(Motor cable)
CNP3A CNP2A CNP1A
Refer to Fig. 3.3.13. Control cable 2 (CNR2)

(Motor cable)

IPM drive unit
(Encoder cable)
Power unit
<View "A"-"A" (Right inside view)>
Fig. 3.3.12 Connection of control cables 1, 2 and 3: Robot controller side (layout and connection)
3-12
7 As shown in Fig. 3.3.13, connect and fix the ground wire of control cable 3.
Fix the copper tape winding area to the flexible cable saddle with a cable tie, and install
the flexible saddle onto the FG of the multi power supply unit and fix it with the screws.
Control cable 3 (CNR4) (Encoder cable)

Connect CNEC1 and CNEC2 to IPM drive unit.
Fixing to FG of multi power

マルチ電源ユニットの FGsupply
に固定する unit
銅テープ巻き付け部をフレキ用
Place the copper tape winding
サドル上にのせ、ケーブルをフ
area onto the flexible cable
レキ用サドルにケーブルタイで
saddle, and fix the cable to the
flexible cable saddle with a
固定する。
cable tie.
Tighten the cable ties (x2)

フレキ用サドルとケーブル (銅
diagonally so that the flexible
テープ巻部 )を接触させるように
cable saddle and cable (copper
ケーブルタイを斜めにかけて締
tape winding area) make
contact. (2本)。
め付ける
Fig. 3.3.13 Ground connection for control cable 3 (fixing to the FG of the multi power supply unit)
8 Referring to Fig. 3.3.13, lay out control cable 3, and referring to Fig. 3.3.12, connect it to
CNEC1 and CNEC2 of the IPM drive unit.
9 The subsequent procedure is the same as 7 to 9 on page 3-8.
3-13
3.3.3 SRA/MC/MR/LP/SC/ST/ST210TP/VS connection

on the controller.
WARNING
The installation positions (connectors) for the manipulator and robot controller, and wire
harnesses have the connector names written on. Follow Fig. 3.3.14, and connect each connector
and harness correctly with the connectors/harnesses of the same name. There are "male” and
“female” cable connectors, which have different key seats. This structure is used to prevent
mistaken connections, so forcing connectors together will cause damage. Be careful when
making connections.
Wire harness
(Control cable)
Robot controller side

connection is
completed at the
timing of the shipping.
Manipulator side
connection
Rear of manipulator CNR010

BJ1BOX (Application）
CNR04 CNR4
CNR02 CNR2
CNR01 CNR1
Manipulator Robot controller
Fig. 3.3.14 Connection of Wire harness (SRA166)
3-14
3.4 Teach pendant connection

Described here are the connections for the teach pendant that is used with the robot controller.
Please be careful about the following points when handling the teach pendant.
If the touch panel or sheet key is scratched, damaged, deformed or altered, there is the
danger that the teach pendant will malfunction or cease to operate.
WARNING
(1) Use the teach pendant in a location not exposed to airborne substances such as
welding fumes, spatters, and slag.
(2) When installing or storing the teach pendant, select a location not exposed to the
airborne substances described above.
(3) Do not pierce or scrape the touch panel with sharp or pointed objects, and only press it
as hard as necessary.
(4) Do not drop the teach pendant or subject it to strong shocks.
(5) Do not wipe the teach pendant with organic solvents such as thinner or benzene.
Wipe it gently with a soft cloth or one moistened with detergent or alcohol.

Wiring work should be done after turning off the primary power supply and circuit
breaker on the controller.
WARNING
2 Remove the maintenance cover shown in Fig. 3.4.1.
3 Pull the teach pendant connector through the service entrance on the back of the robot
Fig. 3.4.1 Connection of Teach pendant (Pull cables through)
3-15
4 Fix the shielding part of the cable. There are two methods to fix the shield part. Confirm
the figure of shield fixing fitting and fix it using proper method.
- In case that there exists the shielding fixing plate on the left side of the inlet
Fix the shield fixing plate as described below.
<Right view>
Shield fixing plate

Teach pendant
Shielding fixing plate cable
on the left side of the
inlet.
Shield ground
Fig. 3.4.2 Connection of Teach pendant (Fix the shielding ground)
- In case that there does not exist the shielding fixing plate on the left side of the inlet
Shield grounding wire saddle (the circle part in the following figure) is attached on the
center of the right side of robot controller.
There exists the part on the cable that shield is bared by peeling the sheath (wound
cooper tape). Pinch the part by the wire saddle, push the wire saddle until it clicks.
<Right view>
Pinch TP cable shield grounding
part (wound cooper tape) by
clamp parts.
Shield grounding wire

saddle (Upper side)
Push it until it clicks.
Fig. 3.4.3 Connection of Teach pendant (Fix the shielding ground)
5 Fix the flange to the robot controller.
3-16
6 Wire the cables as shown in Fig. 3.4.4, and connect the CPU board CNLAN2 and
sequence board CNTP.
Fig. 3.4.4 Connection of Teach pendant (Cable wiring and connector connection)
7 To continue connecting the operation box and starting box, proceed to section 3.5.
If the operation box and starting box will not be connected, attach the maintenance cover
removed in 2
3-17
3.5 Operation box & Starting box connection
3.5.1 Operation box connection

In case that the operation box and starting boxes are used, connect them as described below.
As with the robot controller, install the operation box outside the guarding fence.
1. Install the operation box in a location where it will not be directly exposed to the welding
fumes, spatter, slag and other flying matter.
WARNING 2. When substituting the function of an operation box with a device such as a jig controller
(such as an external starting method), the work here is not required. In this case, the
following action is required.
・Order a connection terminal block and selector switch assembly for connecting the
“MODE SELECT SWITCH”.
( For the connection method and function details, refer to section 2.2 in
CONTROLLER MAINTENANCE MANUAL.)
・Please obtain the “EMERGENCY STOP”, “MOTOR ON”, “START” and “STOP”
buttons yourself.

on the controller.
WARNING
In case of installing the operation panel, the operation box cannot be used.
IMPORTANT
2 Remove the maintenance cover shown in Fig. 3.5.1.
3 Pull the operating box connector through the service entrance on the back of the robot
Fig. 3.5.1 Connection of Operation box (Pull cables through)
3-18
4 Fix the shield section of the cables to the shield fixing fixtures on the left side of the
service entrance as shown in Fig. 3.5.2.
Shield fixing plate

Operation box
cable
Shield ground
Fig. 3.5.2 Connection of Operation box (Fix the shielding ground)
5 Fix the flange to the robot controller.
6 Wire the cables as shown in Fig. 3.5.3, and connect the sequence board CNOP and
CNOP2.
Fig. 3.5.3 Connection of Operation box (Cable wiring and connector connection)
7 Attach the maintenance cover.
3-19
3.5.2 Starting box connection

Follow the procedures below to connect the starting box with operation box.
As with the robot controller, install the operation box outside the guarding fence.
1. Install the operation box in a location where it will not be directly exposed to the welding
fumes, spatter, slag and other flying matter.
WARNING 2. The procedure described in this section is not required when a jig controller or other
device is to be used to provide the functions of the operation box (when an external
start system is involved). The user is responsible for providing the “emergency stop,”
“motor power,” “start” and “stop” buttons, etc.

WARNING on the controller.
1. Starting box is optional equipment.

2. In case of installing the operation panel, the starting box cannot be used.
IMPORTANT
2 Connect the starting box to the robot controller.
3 Remove the cover plate on the top of the operation box that corresponds to each station
number concerned, and remove the corresponding connector (CNST2, 3, or 4) mounted
on the printed circuit board inside operation box. (This concerns only the connectors for
mounting the starting box.) Retain the removed connectors in a safe place. Please
keep carefully for the removed corresponding connector.
4 After removing the short-circuit connector, connect the starting box connector. The
station No. and connector No. correspond each other as follows. (See the table below.)
Table 3.5.1 Destinations of Starting box

Station No. Connector No. inside operation box
2 CNST2
3 CNST3
4 CNST4
Station
No.2 No.3 No.4
Cover plate
To Sequence board
CNOP, CNOP2
CNST4
CNST3
CNST2
Fig. 3.5.4 Mounting positions in the starting box
3-20
3.6 Installation of Optional board for physical I/O signals

To connect an external device using physical I/O signals, at least one of the boards/functions shown in Table
3.6.1 is required.
Sections 3.6.1 to 3.6.3 explain an overview of each board and function, and the connection method to the robot
controller.
Table 3.6.1 Lineup of Optional I/O board for Physical I/O
Board name Standard / Optional Reference
Standard for arc welding

P3-22
Arc I/F board specifications
Optional for other specifications “Arc I/F Board Installation”
P3-24
Relay unit + I/O board Optional
“Relay Unit + I/O Board Installation”
P3-27
I/O board Optional
“I/O Board Installation”
When using field bus functions such as DeviceNet,

Field bus functions Optional
refer to each of the related option manual.
INFO. The arc I/F board is a standard installation for arc welding specifications.
Eight general physical input signals and eight general physical output signals can be used
for the arc I/F board.
When connecting external devices in the following specifications, at least 1

type of option explained in Table 3.6.1 is required.
● When the specifications other than arc welding specification are selected
IMPORTANT ● When 9 or more general physical input points or general physical output points are
required
3-21
3.6.1 Arc I/F Board Installation

3.6.1.1 Overview of the Arc I/F Board
One arc I/F board can be connected to one robot controller, and the board has a general I/O
terminal block as well as an interface function for connecting with the arc welding controller.
Table 3.6.2 shows the added I/O points.
This section explains the installation method of the Arc I/F board, and the connection method
for the general I/O wires.
Table 3.6.2 Number of I/O signals of Arc I/F board
Number of Signals
Input 8 pnts. / Output 8 pnts in total
3.6.1.2 Installation Position of the Arc I/F Board

Fig. 3.6.1 shows the installation position of the Arc I/F board.
- If the robot and arc welding controller are purchased at the same time, this board is
pre-installed in the robot controller before shipment. In this case, you do not have to install
INFO.
it.
- If this board is purchased after purchasing the robot controller, you need to install it.
Installation services are available at a separate charge.
Fig. 3.6.1 Installation Position of the Arc I/F Board
3-22
Wiring Method of the Physical I/O Signal Wires for Arc I/F board
2 Remove the panels on the right side of the robot controller.
Fig. 3.6.2 Pulling Through General I/O Signal Cables

3 Drill a hole in the panel, and pass the signal line cable through it.
Drill the hole suitable for the

size of the signal cable.
Panel Signal line cable
Use the appropriate cable clamp to prevent

any foreign material from getting inside.
Fig. 3.6.3 Processing Diagram of General I/O Signal Cable for Arc I/F board (Panel)
When passing through from the side, the cable flange (option) shown in Table 3.6.3 can
also be used.
Table 3.6.3 Cable Flanges (Option) for passing through I/O Wires
Parts name DWG No.
Cable flange (with cable clamp for the cable diameter φ9 – 19) L21160M
Cable flange (with cable clamp for the cable diameter φ6～12) L21160N
4 Attach the panel to the controller.
5 Connect the I/O wires to the Arc I/F board.
1. For details on the Arc I/F board physical I/O signals, see below.
P. 3-48 “3.9.1 Common
INFO.
P. 3-50 “3.9.2 I/O signal specifications of Arc I/F board”
2. For details of the connection to welding power source, refer to the instruction manual
“Application (Arc Welding)”.
Before using the controller, be sure to close the door completely, and lock the door key.
Using the controller without locking the door key may cause dust, spatters from welding, or
else to enter the controller, thus resulting in failures.
CAUTION
3-23
3.6.2 Relay Unit + I/O Board Installation

3.6.2.1 Overview of the Relay Unit + I/O Board
The relay unit is used in combination with the I/O board.
A maximum of 2 boards can be connected to 1 robot controller.
This section explains the installation method of the relay unit and I/O board, and the connection
method for the general I/O wires.
Table 3.6.4 Relay unit + I/O board

Name
Number of signals Board used in combination
<Physical I/O No.>
IN 32 pts. / Out 32 pts. Relay unit
I/O board 1
In total <IN/1～IN32, OUT1～OUT32>
Relay unit
I/O board 1
IN 64 pts. / Out 64 pts. <IN/1～IN32, OUT1～OUT32>
In total Extended Relay unit
I/O board 2
<IN/33～IN64, OUT33～OUT64>
Precautions to install 2 relay units

- Rough number of signals that can be turned on at the same time is input 40 points and
output 40 points in total.
CAUTION - In case that input 64 points and output 64 points are turned on at the same time, provide
DC 24 V by an external power supply whose capacity is 40 W or more. For the
procedures to provide the power by external power supply, refer to the section 3.9.3.2.
INFO. Switching between plus common and minus common can be performed if the CNSW
(short connector) is switched.
3.6.2.2 Installation position of the Relay Unit + I/O Board

- If the robot, relay unit and I/O board are purchased at the same time, they are
pre-installed in the robot controller before shipment. In this case, you do not have to
INFO.
install them.
- If they are purchased after purchasing the robot controller, you need to install them.
Installing 2 Relay Units

If a second relay unit is added after purchasing the robot controller, settings for the I/O
IMPORTANT board dip switch that is added at the same time must be configured.
See section 3.5.3.5, and configure the dip switch before installing the I/O board.
Fig. 3.6.4 and Fig. 3.6.5 are as shown below.

- Relay Unit and I/O Board Installation Position
- Connection Method of Both Boards
- Relay Unit and Terminal Block Position
Fig. 3.6.4 shows when there is 1 relay unit, and Fig. 3.6.5 when there are 2 relay units.
3-24
Fig. 3.6.4 Positions of the Relay Unit, Terminal Block and I/O Board (1 Relay Unit Used)
Fig. 3.6.5 Positions of the Relay Unit, Additional Relay Unit, Terminal Block and I/O Board (2 Relay Units Used)
Wiring Method of the Physical I/O Signal Wires for Relay Unit + I/O board
2 Remove the panels on the right side of the robot controller.
Fig. 3.6.6 Pulling Through General I/O Signal Cables
3-25


Fig. 3.6.7 General I/O Signal Cable Processing Diagram (Panel)
When passing through from the side, the cable flange (option) shown in Table 3.6.5 can
also be used.
Table 3.6.5 Cable Flanges (Option) for Passing through I/O wires
Parts name DWG No.
Cable flange (with cable clamp for the cable diameter φ9 – 19) L21160M
Cable flange (with cable clamp for the cable diameter φ6～12) L21160N
4 Connect the I/O wires to the relay unit. Fasten the wire tightly onto the terminal block with
the binding band to prevent it from falling off after wiring. The binding band is a provided
attachment.
Tie band
Fig. 3.6.8 Relay Unit Terminal Block Retainer
INFO. For details on the linear unit + I/O board physical I/O signals, see below.
P. 3-48 “3.9.1 Common
P. 3-55 “3.9.3 I/O signal specifications of Relay unit with I/O board”
CAUTION
3-26
3.6.3 I/O Board Installation

3.6.3.1 Overview of the I/O Board
A maximum of 3 I/O boards can be connected to 1 robot controller.
This section explains the installation method of the I/O board, and the connection method for
the general I/O wires.
- When using the internal DC24V power supply, only 1 board can be connected.
- The number of additional boards is limited when additional boards (field path function,
IMPORTANT additional Ethernet boards etc) are installed to the PCI bus.
Table 3.6.6 I/O board

Number of I/O board Number of signals
1 IN 32pts. / OUT 32pts. In total
● If the robot and I/O board are purchased at the same time, the board is pre-installed in
INFO. the robot controller before shipment. In this case, you do not have to install it.
● If the board is purchased after purchasing the robot controller, you need to install it.
3.6.3.2 Dip switch setting of I/O board

If more than one I/O board is used, the dip switch SW1 settings need to be configured.
Configure the dip switch settings before installing the I/O board.
The setting details and SW1 position are each shown in Table 3.6.7 and Fig. 3.6.9.
Table 3.6.7 Dip switch SW1 setting of I/O board

Setting Part Conditions Remarks
Name No. 2 1
OFF OFF I/O board 1 (Initial settings)
OFF ON I/O board 2
I/O Board SW1
ON OFF I/O board 3
ON ON Not used.
CNIN FCIO CNOUT
SW1 and silk indication
Fig. 3.6.9 Dip switch SW1 setting of I/O board
3-27
3.6.3.3 I/O Board Installation Position and Connector Position

The positions of the board(s) and the connecters are shown in Fig. 3.6.10.
Fig. 3.6.10 The positions of I/O board(s) and the connecters
3-28
Wiring Method of the Physical I/O Signal Wires for the I/O Board
2 Remove the panel from the back or right side of the robot controller that does not have
cables connected.
Fig. 3.6.11 Pulling Through Cables to the I/O Board


Fig. 3.6.12 Processing Diagram of General I/O Signal Cable for I/O board (Panel)
4 Connect the wires to the connectors.

I/O board
Connectors
Output
provided
connector
Soldering CNOUT
Input connector
Signal cable CNIN
Fig. 3.6.13 I/O Board Signal Cable Processing Diagram (Connector)
・Solder the connections to the connectors provided (for CNIN and CNOUT).
・Ask a specialist to do the job if the available personnel lack the necessary soldering
skills.
INFO. For details on the I/O board physical I/O signals, see below.
page 3-48 “3.9.1 Common”
page 3-61 “3.9.4 I/O signal specifications of I/O board”
CAUTION
3-29
3.7 Safety-related signal connections

In this section, such safety-related signals as the emergency stop signal and safety plug signal will be
connected. Be sure to connect these signals as a safety measure for operators who perform teaching work and
as an emergency stop measure when a fault has occurred.
This controller comes with safety redundancy circuits as a standard feature. Connect a separate pair of signals
each for the external emergency stop input, safety plug input and enable switch input. The controller will not work
properly if any of the separate pairs of signal inputs are mismatched in the safety redundancy circuits.
A safety plug or enable switch is required to perform the teaching work inside the safety
fence. These connections must be performed without fail. If a safety plug is not going to
be used, install a “switch that permits automatic start” outside the safety fence, ensure that
CAUTION it is constructed in such a way that it cannot easily be set to ON in case operators are
working inside the safety fence, and connect its signal to the safety plug input.
3.7.1 Sequence board

The terminals for the safety-related signals are located on TBEX1, TBEX2 on “Sequence
board”. The position of the Sequence board is shown in Fig. 3.7.1.
Fig. 3.7.1 Position of the Sequence board
3-30
3.7.2 Position of the terminal block

Fig. 3.7.2 shows the positions of terminal blocks TBEX1 and TBEX2.
Fig. 3.7.2 TBEX1, TBEX2 on the I/O sequence board
For the signal wire that will be connected to the terminal block, use a bar terminal (end thickness
of 1.5 mm or less) or a PVC wire (thickness 28AWG to 16AWG) with approximately 7 mm of the
end peeled off.
1.5 mm or less
先端が
Use 1.5mm以下の端子を
a terminal with an end
thickness
使用してください。of 1.5 mm or less.
<When<connecting
棒状端子で接続する場合 >
with a bar terminal>
先端の被覆を約
Peel 7mm
back approx. むくこと
7 mm from ビニール線
PVC wire
the end （太さ :28AWG
(Thickness: ～16AWG
28AWG to 16AWG)
）
<ビニール線を接続する場合>
<When connecting a PVC wire>
Fig. 3.7.3 Signal wires to connect to TBEX1 and TBEX2
3-31
3.7.3 Pin layout of Terminal blocks
Fig. 3.7.4 Pin layout of TBEX1 and TBEX2
In the FD controller, the “Motors ON external” signal is not included in the terminal block on
the sequence board. So if you want to turn the Motors ON using the external PLC etc., it is
necessary to assign a general input signal to the “Motors ON external” in advance. See
“4.6.2 Standard input signals” also.
INFO.
(In this example, the “Motors ON external” is assigned to the input signal 29.)
This “Motors ON external” input signal can be assigned in the menu of

<Constant Setting> - [6 Signals] [2 Input Signal Assignment] [1 Standard Inputs].
3-32
Table 3.7.1 Terminal block TBEX1 of Sequence board

Signal
Pin No Function Description
name
16 Teaching enable switch input 2- This is a teach enable switch input terminal.
MATSW2
15 Teaching enable switch input 2+ When not using this terminal, connect jumper
14 Teaching enable switch input 1- wires as shown below.
MATSW1 Connect 13 and 14
13 Teaching enable switch input 1+ Connect 15 and 16
12 Safety plug input 2-
SFP2 This is a safety plug input terminal.
11 Safety plug input 2+ Connect always.
10 Safety plug input 1- Refer to the section 3.7.6.3 on page
SFP1 3-38,
9 Safety plug input 1+
8 G-STOP input 2－
G_EMG2 This is G-STOP input terminal.
7 G-STOP input 2＋ When not using this terminal, connect jumper
wires as shown below.
6 G-STOP input 1－ Connect 5 and 6
G_EMG1 Connect 7 and 8
5 G-STOP input 1＋
4 External emergency stop input 2- This is an external emergency stop input
EX_EMG2 terminal.
3 External emergency stop input 2+
When not using this terminal, connect jumper
2 External emergency stop input 1- wires as shown below.
EX_EMG1 Connect 3 and 4
1 External emergency stop input 1+
Connect 1 and2
When using an external emergency stop button, G-STOP input, safety plug or teach
enable switch, always double-up on connection points.
(E.g.: When an external emergency stop button is used: Pin 1-2 and Pin 3-4)
CAUTION
INFO. “G-STOP” is a function known as a “protective stop” that protects from dangers occurring
in the environment outside of the system when the robot is operating normally.
For details, refer to the section 3.7.6.2.
3-33
Table 3.7.2 Terminal block TBEX2 of Sequence board

Signal
Pin No Function Description
name
By supplying external power (DC24V) between the
10 EX24V and M1 terminals, the emergency stop circuit
can be operated even if the robot controller power is
M1 Ground
cut, and ESOUT1 and ESOUT2 can be turned
9 ON/OFF by the status of the emergency stop button.
Switching between internal power use (factory
setting) and external power supply use is done using
a J1 jumper pin.
8 EX24V External power 24V input For details on J1 settings, see Fig. 3.7.18 and Fig.
3.7.19.
Terminal for DC24V – 0V power inside the robot
controller. Do not use this terminal outside the robot
7 P1 Internal DC24V controller since this is for the internal use only. Also,
do not use this terminal when other devices are to be
installed.
CPU error output –
6 Dry contact A output terminal to indicate the status of
(dry contact)
CPUERR CPU in the robot controller. It turns ON (the contact is
CPU error output +
5 closed) when the CPU error occurs.
(dry contact)
Emergency stop output 2- Dry contact A output terminal to indicate the status of
4
(dry contact) the emergency stop signal.
ESOUT2
Emergency stop output 2+ When the [EMERGENCY STOP BUTTON] on the
3
(dry contact) operation panel of the controller or the teach pendant
Emergency stop output 1- is pressed, this signal turns OFF (the contact is
2
(dry contact) open).
ESOUT1
Emergency stop output 1+ This output has been designed dual. (The dry contact
1 output has been provided in two individual systems.)
(dry contact)
3-34
Fig. 3.7.5 Connection example of TBEX1,2 Fig. 3.7.6 Connection example of TBEX1,2
(DC24V internal power) (DC24V external power)
Do not use the P1 terminal outside the robot controller since this is for the internal use
only.
CAUTION
3-35
3.7.4 Electrical specification of input terminal block

Table 3.7.3 shows the power specifications for 1 input signal point.
Table 3.7.3 Electrical specifications of input terminal block

Items Specifications
Input impedance Approx. 3 kΩ
Input voltage DC+24V ±10%
Input current 8mA (typ.)
Table 3.7.4 and Fig. 3.7.7 show the input load (customer prepared) specifications.
Table 3.7.4 Specifications of the load for input circuit (prepared by customer)
Input load (Customer prepared) Specifications Remarks

Minimum applicable load should be
Relay contact The input signals needs
DC24V, 5 mA
to be closed for 150 ms
Leakage current should be 1 mA or
Open collector device or longer.
less.
Fig. 3.7.7 Specifications of the load for input circuit (prepared by customer)
3.7.5 Electrical specifications of output terminal block

Table 3.7.5 shows the power specifications for 1 output signal point.
Prepare the output load that conforms to these specifications.
Table 3.7.5 Electrical specifications of output terminal block

Output method Relay contact
Rated voltage AC 100 V or DC 30 V
Rated current 1A
Minimum applicable load DC24V 5mA
5
Min. 10 (1A,100 V AC, 1A,30 V DC, resistive load, at 20
Electrical expected life
times/min.)
・Be absolutely sure to use a surge killer for the load.

・Since the value of minimum applicable load depends on the switching frequency,
environment conditions, and expected reliable level, be sure to check with the actual
CAUTION load condition before operation.
・Electrical expected value is a reference value in case of using under the conditions
described in parentheses. The value depends on the environmental conditions.
3-36
3.7.6 Connection procedures on input terminal block

For details on connections for each input terminal, see sections 3.7.6.1 to 3.7.6.5.
3.7.6.1 External emergency stop input (TBEX1: 1-2, 3-4)

As soon as the external emergency stop input signal becomes open under any circumstances
whatsoever, the brake is quickly applied to the robot, and the motor power (servo power) is cut off
by the hardware circuits.
Input the emergency stop command from the emergency stop button or host controller. The
separate pairs of signal inputs must perform the same operations. Connect single normally closed
contact between terminals 1 and 2 and another one between terminals 3 and 4. Bear in mind that
the connections given in Fig. 3.7.9 cannot be performed.
Fig. 3.7.9 Example where the external

Fig. 3.7.8 Connection diagram of external
emergency stop input cannot be
emergency stop inputs
performed
3.7.6.2 G-STOP input (TBEX1: 5-6, 7-8)

If the G-STOP input signal becomes open in any situation, the robot immediately brakes, and
the magnetic switch is disconnected. However, unlike with the external emergency stop input, the
motor power is not cut.
When the “G-STOP Reset” (input signal) of the assigned signal is switched ON and G-STOP
signal closed, the magnetic switch is automatically closed, and operation restarts.
2 independent input signals are required to do the same operation. Connect both 5-6 and 7-8
terminals to independent normal close contacts. Please note that connections such as those
shown in Fig. 3.7.11 cannot be made.
Connections to the light curtain are an ideal example of use. If the worker has interrupted the
light curtain, the robot (only) is stopped with the motor power ON. When the robot has returned to
outside of the light curtain, the servo switches ON automatically, and playback can be continued.
Fig. 3.7.11 Example where G-STOP input

Fig. 3.7.10 Connection diagram of G-STOP cannot be performed
inputs
3-37
3.7.6.3 Safety plug input (TBEX1: 9-10, 11-12)

The guard fence must have a door for allowing the operators to move in and out. Provide a
safety plug to ensure that the robot will be stopped automatically when the door is opened to
ensure that operators will not enter inside the guard fence without due reason while the robot is
operating, and connect the signals of the plug to the safety plug input on the robot controller. The
separate pairs of signal inputs must perform the same operations.
Bear in mind that the connections given in Fig. 3.7.14 cannot be performed.
If the safety plug input signal is left open during auto operation, the brake is quickly applied to
the robot as for emergency stop, and the motor power (servo power) is cut off by the hardware
circuits. In this case, by switching to teach mode, operation preparation (servo power) can be
supplied once again in safety plug input signal open status. However, the operation speed is
limited to low speed (speed of 250mm/sec or below at tool end).
Guarding fence
Manipulator
Limit switch for turning

off the servo power
when the door in the
Welding guard fence is opened
power
source Robot control unit
Fig. 3.7.12 Safety plug installed on Guard fence door
In playback mode, the servo power cannot be switched ON unless the safety plug input is
ON. Always connect the safety plug.
CAUTION
[Condition of the safety plug input signals that is required for turning ON the motors power]
TEACH mode: When both in opened and closed, motor ON is available.
(The speed is limited to 250 mm/s.)
(If the opened/closed status changes, the motors are turned OFF for the present.)
PLAYBACK mode: Available only in closed state. (The limit of 250 mm/s is not applied.)
Fig. 3.7.13 Connection diagram of the safety Fig. 3.7.14 Example where the safety plug input
plug inputs cannot be connected
3-38
3.7.6.4 Teach enable switch input (TBEX1: 13-14, 15-16)

For the enable switch inputs, input a condition allowing robot operation in the teach mode. A
mat switch can be connected, for instance. Short-circuit the terminal block when the enable switch
is not going to be used.
Fig. 3.7.15 Connection diagram of enable switch inputs

3.7.6.5 Connections when the robot controller is used by itself
When the robot controller is not going to be connected to an external device but used by itself,
perform the connections shown below. The external emergency stop, G-STOP and teach enable
switches are shorted, but connect the safety plug for detecting that the door of the guard fence
has been opened to the safety plug inputs.
Fig. 3.7.16 Diagram of connections when the robot controller is to be used by itself
Table 3.7.6 Jumper setting (Initial setting)

Terminal No. to be
Terminal block Remarks
short-circuited
15-16 Enable switch input 2
13-14 Enable switch input 1
7-8 G-STOP input 2
TBEX1
5-6 G-STOP input 1
3-4 External emergency stop input 2
1-2 External emergency stop input 1
3-39
3.7.7 Emergency stop output connection (TBEX2 : 1-2, 3-4)

Internal electrical circuit of Emergency stop output is shown in Fig. 3.7.17.
Fig. 3.7.17 Internal electrical circuit of Emergency stop output
The emergency stop output circuit uses internal power supply of the controller, and when the
power supply of the controller becomes OFF, the emergency stop button output signal becomes
OFF too. In the case to use the emergency stop output even when the power supply of the
controller is OFF, supply external power supply from TBEX2, and change the setting of the above
jumper (J1)
Fig. 3.7.18 In case that emergency stop circuit is used by internal DC24 V (Initial setting)
Fig. 3.7.19 In case that emergency stop circuit is used by external DC24 V
3-40
3.8 Power connections
3.8.1 Prior to Primary power supply connections
1. Electric shock may cause serious injury or death.

Wiring work should be done after turning off the primary power supply and circuit
breaker on the controller.
WARNING 2. Check that the voltage of the primary power supply tallies with the voltage
specification of the robot controller. The voltage of the robot controller is indicated
near the circuit breaker.
3. In case that the rated voltage other than Table 3.8.1 is specified at time of order, the
proper step-down transformer is pre-installed to the robot controller before shipment.
If the robot controller is used at the different voltage from the one at time of order after
the delivery, reconfigure the setting of the step-down transformer. For details of a
step-down transformer, refer to the instruction manual “CONTROLLER
MAINTENANCE MANUAL”.
The specifications of this robot controller’s primary power supply are as follows.
Table 3.8.1 Rating of primary power
Power-handling
Manipulator used in combination Rated voltage
capacity (Note)
NB4 / NV6 1.5 kVA
NB4L / NV6L / NB15 / NV20 2.4 kVA
NH5 1.0 kVA
NV50 5.5 kVA
3-phase AC200V
NV166 / NV210 (+10%, -15%) 7 kVA
SRA / SRA-H series 50/60 Hz 7.0 kVA
LP-01 series 6.2 kVA
MC20-01, MC10L-01, MC12S-01 For other voltage 1.7 kVA
specifications, refer to
MC35/50/70-01 5.0 kVA
the standard
MC350-01 specification sheet of 8.6 kVA
MC280L-01 the FD controller 9.0 kVA
MR20-02, MR20L-01 or 1.0 kVA
MR35/50-01 contact our sales 4.1 kVA
department.
SC400L-04,05 7.5 kVA
SC700DL-05,07 9.9 kVA
ST210TP-01,02 7.0 kVA
VS series 2.0 kVA
(Note) Varies according to the application and operation pattern.
For the specifications of other manipulators, refer to each “Standard specification“ or instruction
manual “MANIPULATOR”.
1. When multiple manipulators or external axes are combined, a power capacity equivalent
to the total power of all the machines is required. Calculate the power capacity by
referring to “External Axes” in the instruction manual.
IMPORTANT 2. When using a different voltage transformer, prepare one after calculating the power
capacity of the entire system.
3-41
3.8.2 Primary power supply connections

2 Remove the primary power supply cable service cover on the left side of the breaker.
Connect the primary cable to the circuit breaker on the robot controller through the cable
bushing accessory. Use the following cable for the primary power supply cable.
Table 3.8.2 Cable specifications of primary power
Crimp-style terminal Cross-section
Manipulator used in Cross-section of Crimp-style terminal
of no-fuse circuit of grounding
combination power cable of grounding cable
breaker cable
M4 round
NB4 / NV6 / NB4L / NV6L 3.5 mm2
crimp-style terminal
NB15 / NV20 / NH5 M5 round or more
(3.5 - 4)
(3.5 - 5)
NV50 / NV166 / NV210
2
3.5 mm Japan, China, Europe
or more M5 round 2 M5 round
crimp-style terminal 5.5 mm
(3.5 - 5) or more
SRA, MC, MR, LP, SC, (3.5 - 5)
ST210TP, ST, VS, etc.
North America
M8 round
(3.5 - 5)
Primary power supply cable

(Provided by user)
Cable lead-in cover
No-fuse circuit breaker
(NFB1)
Cable bushing
To leakage circuit breaker

(Provided by user)
Fig. 3.8.1 Concerning the primary power supply cable
3 As shown in Fig. 3.8.2, connect the primary power cable to the primary side of the
breaker, and the ground wire to the ground terminal (PE).
4 Attach the primary power supply cable service cover to the robot controller.
Always attach the primary power cable with a cable clamp, and pull it through to the robot
controller. If a cable clamp is not installed, water or dust may get inside the robot controller,
which may cause a failure.
CAUTION
3-42
Fig. 3.8.2 Connection of the primary cable
5 Between the circuit breakers on the robot controller and power supply source and the
welding power supply source, install a no-fuse circuit breaker (3-phase AC 200 V) or
leakage circuit breaker that supports the current used by the model concerned.
Table 3.8.3 Working current for each manipulator

Manipulator used in combination Working current
NB4 / NV6 / NB4L / NV6L / NB15 / NV20 / NH5 15A
NV50 / NV166 / NV 210 40A
Breaker spec.:
Japan：40A
SRA, MC, MR, LP, SC, China：15A
ST210TP, ST, VS etc.,
Europe：15A
North America：30A
1. An inverter circuit for controlling the AC servo motor is used in this robot controller.In
order to prevent the leakage circuit breaker from being tripped in error by the
high-frequency leakage current generated from the inverter circuit, the leakage circuit
CAUTION breaker must be designated for inverter use when one is to be used.
2. When installing the leakage circuit breaker, use one with a medium current
sensitivity(100 mA or more).
3. The values in the table indicate the current values for one robot controller.
When multiple controllers are connected to the same beaker, prepare a
breaker with a capacity of the sum of the corresponding values in the table.
When multiple manipulators or external axes are combined, the breaker capacity that you
should prepare is different. For details, see “External Axes”.
IMPORTANT
6 When connecting welding power supply, also install a no-fuse breaker that is compatible
with the used primary welding electric current (3-phase, AC200V) or a leakage breaker.
3-43
INFO. For details on the breakers suitable for welders, see the instruction manual for
each welder.
In order to minimize the effect of noise due to current leakage, supply the primary power of
the robot controller and primary power of the welding power supply from separate power
supplies. In addition, connect the grounding terminals on the robot controller and welding
CAUTION power supply separately and isolate the connections from each other.
To ensure safety, ground the equipment without fail.

WARNING
3-44
3.8.3 Grounding
In case of Arc Welding Applications with NB4 / NV6 / NB4L / NV6L / NB15 / NV20 / NH5
To ensure safety, use the grounding method (type D ground) described in Fig. 3.8.3.
(The customer is responsible for providing the grounding wires.)
- Ground the manipulator separately using the M8 tap at the bottom part of the main unit and a
grounding cable with a diameter of at least 3.5 mm2.
- Ground the robot controller separately using a grounding cable with a diameter of at least 3.5
mm2. The grounding terminals of the robot controller are located above the circuit breaker and
on the bottom of the robot controller.
- Ground the welding power supply separately using a grounding cable with a diameter of at least
14 mm2 for the model 350A and at least 22 mm2 for the model 500A. For details, refer to the
operating instructions of the welding power supply concerned.
- For each ground cable, use as short a cable as possible.
- Set the ground resistance to less than 100 ohms.
- As shown in Fig. 3.8.3, connect the (1), (2), (3) and (4) grounds separately and isolate the
connections from each other, and do not allow under any circumstances whatsoever the
grounding wires or grounding poles to be shared with any other source of electrical or
mechanical power.
- When using metal pipes, ducts or distributing frames to install grounding cables, ground the
metal pipes, etc. in compliance with the technical standards governing electrical apparatus.
Fig. 3.8.3 Grounding
Note) The above is a rough diagram of CO2 welding. For TIG welding, do not place the robot controller
and welding workbench on the common base.
3-45
Fig. 3.8.4 Welding current flow to the robot controller
As shown in Fig. 3.8.4, if the (B) workpiece side cable connections have not been
performed properly, the welding current will flow through the motor frame to the robot
controller, possibly damaging the robot controller: this is very dangerous. Furthermore,
CAUTION similar care must be taken when using a separate welding power supply for the tack
welding of workpieces.
3-46
For handling or spot welding specifications (including large-sized manipulator)
To ensure safety, use the grounding method (type D ground)

(The customer is responsible for providing the grounding wires.)
- Ensure that the robot controller power cable is larger than 3.5 mm2, and ground cable is larger
than 5.5 mm2. Also, connect an independent ground cable. The ground terminal for the robot
controller is on the upper part of the breaker.
- When adding an external axis, pull out the ground wire from the metal case of the motor to be
installed, and ground the external axis motor independently. A ground cable of 3.5 mm2 or higher
is recommended.
- For details on grounding the welding power supply, see the instruction manual for each welder.
- For each ground cable, use as short a cable as possible.
- Set the ground resistance to less than 100 ohms.
- When grounding the robot controller, never share the grounding wires or grounding rods with
other power supplies or motor power.
- When using metal pipes, ducts or distributing frames to install grounding cables, ground the
metal pipes, etc. in compliance with the technical standards governing electrical apparatus.
External axes External axis

(Jig axes) (Fixed spot gun)
Robot controller
At least 3.5mm2 At least 3.5mm2 At least 5.5mm2
Fig. 3.8.5 Grounding
3-47
3.9Signal specifications of Optional Physical I/O board
3.9 Signal specifications of Optional Physical I/O board

This section explains the physical I/O signal specifications for the Arc I/F board, Relay Unit + I/O board, and
I/O board. Refer to Table 3.9.1, and refer to the correct explanation for your board.
Table 3.9.1 Reference Explanations for Each Board
Board name Reference

Common items Individual
Arc I/F board page 3-50 Refer to the section 3.9.2.
Refer to the
Relay unit + I/O board This page page 3-55 Refer to the section 3.9.3.
section 3.9.1.
I/O board page 3-61 Refer to the section 3.9.4.
3.9.1 Common items

3.9.1.1 DC24V supplying procedure
The capacity for the DC24V that can be supplied by the internal DC24V is 0.8A.
If the input/output current for the used external device exceeds this value, you need to prepare
an external DC24V power supply.
In case of supplying the internal DC24V to the external device, the Relay Unit cannot be
combined due to the capacity limitation of the internal DC24V.
3.9.1.2 Electrical specifications of physical input

Table 3.9.2 shows the power specifications for 1 input signal point. This is the same for all
boards.
Table 3.9.2 Electrical specifications of physical input

Input impedance Approx. 3 kΩ
Input voltage DC+24 V ±10 %
Input current 8 mA (typ.)
Table 3.9.3 and Fig. 3.9.1 show the input load (customer prepared) specifications.
Table 3.9.3 Specifications of the load for input circuit (prepared by customer)
Input load (Customer prepared) Specifications Remarks

Minimum applicable load should be
Relay contact
DC24V, 5 mA The input signals needs to be
Leakage current should be 1 mA or closed for 150ms or longer.
Open collector device
less.
Fig. 3.9.1 Specifications of the load for input circuit (prepared by customer)
INFO. A transistor (PNP) type can be selected for the relay unit.
page 3-59, Refer to “Fig. 3.9.8 Signal connection with external jigs”.
3-48
3.9.1.3 Electrical specifications of physical output

Table 3.9.4 and Table 3.9.5 show the power specifications for 1 output signal point for each
board.
Prepare the output load that conforms to the used physical output signal.
Electrical specifications of physical output (Arc I/F board, Relay unit + I/O board)
Table 3.9.4 Electrical specifications of physical output (Arc I/F board, Relay unit + I/O board)
Output method Relay contact
Rated voltage AC 100 V or DC 30 V
Rated current 1A
Minimum applicable load DC24V 5mA
5
Min. 10 (1A,100 V AC, 1A,30 V DC, resistive load, at 20
Electrical expected life
times/min.)

・Since the value of minimum applicable load depends on the switching frequency,
environment conditions, and expected reliable level, be sure to check with the actual
CAUTION load condition before operation.
・Electrical expected value is a reference value in case of using under the conditions
described in parentheses. The value depends on the environmental conditions.
Electrical specifications of physical output (I/O board)
Table 3.9.5 Electrical specifications of physical output (I/O board)
Rated voltage DC+24 V ±3 V
Rated current 0.1 A

・Do not use power with the wrong polarity.
CAUTION
3-49
3.9.2 I/O signal specifications of Arc I/F board

3.9.2.1 I/O signal specifications of Arc I/F board
Table 3.9.6 and Table 3.9.7 show the input signal specifications and output signal specifications
for the Arc I/F board terminal block.
Table 3.9.6 Input terminal block TBIN of Arc I/F board

Pin No. Signal name Signal (I*) Descriptions
Internal power source 0V
14 M1 Internal 0V
(to drive relays)
13 M1 Internal 0V Internal power source 0V
Internal power source DC24V
12 P1 Internal 24V
(to drive relays)
9 10 11 12 13 14
11 P1 Internal 24V Internal power source DC24V
10 INCOM102 COMMON Common for IN101～IN104
9 IN104 I104
8 IN103 I103
General input signals
8
7 IN102 I102
7
6 IN101 I101
6
5
5 INCOM101 COMMON Common for IN97～IN100
34
4 IN100 I100
2
3 IN99 I99
1
General input signals
2 IN98 I98
1 IN97 I97
9 10 11 12
Table 3.9.7 Output terminal block TBOUT of Arc I/F board
Pin No. Signal name Signal (O*) Descriptions
12 OUTCOM102 COMMON Common for OUT101～OUT104
8
7
11 OUT104 O104
6
5
10 OUT103 O103
General output signals
4
9 OUT102 O102
32
8 OUT101 O101
1
7 OUTCOM101 COMMON Common for OUT97～OUT100
6 OUT100 O100
5 OUT99 O99 Terminal
General output signals blocks
4 OUT98 O98
TBIN /
3 OUT97 O97
TBOUT
2 HP- HP- Warning lamp signal -
1 HP+ HP+ Warning lamp signal +
3-50
3.9.2.2 Connections to the Arc I/F Board Input Signals
INFO. For details on the electrical specifications for the input signals, see “3.9.1.2 Electrical
specifications of physical input” on page 3-48.
The following example shows connections to the Arc I/F Board Input Signals
When internal power is used for the DC24V power supply This page Refer to Fig. 3.9.2.
When external power is used for the DC24V power supply page 3-52 Refer to Fig. 3.9.3.
Fig. 3.9.2 Input circuit of Arc I/F board (When DC24V is supplied from internal power)
3-51
Fig. 3.9.3 Input circuit of Arc I/F board (When DC24V is supplied from external power)
Internal and external power supplies can be used together since there is a separate common
for every four input circuits.
(Example)
Input signals Power sources
I1 ～ I4 Internal
I5 ～ I8 External
Do not connect external power to the internal power pin.

Also, do not connect different power system signals to the same common.
Doing so may cause malfunctions.
CAUTION
3-52
3.9.2.3 Connections to the Arc I/F Board Output Signals
INFO. For details on the electrical specifications of the output signals, see P. 3-49 “Electrical
specifications of physical output”.
The following example shows connections to the Arc I/F Board output signals
- Be absolutely sure to use a surge killer for the load.

- Do not connect external power to the internal power pin.
CAUTION
External power supply should be required to connect the output signals.

IMPORTANT
Fig. 3.9.4 Output circuit of Arc I/F board (When DC24V is supplied from external power)
3-53
3.9.2.4 Warning lamp connections to Arc I/F board

The Arc I/F board HP+/HP- terminals close and open together with the ON/OFF operation of the
servo ON magnet switch. By connecting a warning lamp, the operator can be notified when the
servo switches ON/OFF.
While the robot can possibly start operating in a condition such as when it has temporarily
stopped or stopped, waiting for an external signal input, it is impossible for an operator
visually to judge the condition.
WARNING In order to maintain safety of the operators, install a warning lamp to make it stand out on
the guarding fence etc. so that operators can notice that the robot is ready to operate,
which prevents personnel from entering the guarding fence.
Warning lamp
Guarding fence
Manipulator
Welding
power
source Robot control unit
Fig. 3.9.5 Warning lamp
Fig. 3.9.6 Example of warning lamp connection
External power supply should be required to connect the warning lamp.

IMPORTANT
INFO. The specifications of this signal are as same as those of general physical output signal on
the same terminal block. For details, refer to the section 3.9.1.3 on page 3-49.
3-54
3.9.3 I/O signal specifications of Relay unit with I/O board

3.9.3.1 I/O signal specifications of relay unit
This section shows the input signal specifications and output signal specifications for the relay
unit terminal blocks.
References for the explanations of each terminal block are shown in Table 3.9.8.
Table 3.9.8 Relay Unit Terminal Block Input Signal Specifications and Output Signal Specifications (Factory Settings)
I/O type Terminal block No. Reference

Terminal block TBIN1 page 3-56 Refer to Table 3.9.9.
Input
Terminal block TBIN2 page 3-56 Refer to Table 3.9.10.
Terminal block TBOUT1 page 3-57 Refer to Table 3.9.11.
Output
Terminal blockTBIOUT2 page 3-57 Refer to Table 3.9.12.
For general signals, logical signals used as status signals can be assigned freely.
Table 3.9.9 to Table 3.9.12 show the factory setting assignments.
For details on the assignment method, see “4.6 Signal attribute settings”.
INFO.
Initial settings of signal allocations depend on the application type.
3-55
Table 3.9.9 List of input signals(TBIN1)

Terminal block Signal
Signal name Pin description
pin No. (I*)
1 IN1 I1 General-purpose input signals
5 IN COM1 COMMON Common for pins 1 to 4 (IN1～IN4)
21 24V Internal 24V 24V internal power supply
22 EX 24VA Input 24V External power supply input (24V)
23 EX 24VB Output 24V External power supply output (24V)
Table 3.9.10 List of input signals(TBIN2)

pin No. (I*)
1 EX 0VB Output 0V External power supply output (0V)
2 EX 0VA Input 0V External power supply input (0V)
3 0V Internal 0V 0V internal power supply
4 IN17 I17 Program selection bit 1
14 IN25 I25 Program strobe U1
17 IN28 I28 Welding ON/OFF
20 IN30 I30 Ext. play start.
External stop (keep an input signal supplied here
21 IN31 I31
when this pin is not used.)
22 IN32 I32 External motor power OFF
3-56
Table 3.9.11 List of output signals (TBOUT1)

pin No. (O*)
1 OUT1 O1 General-purpose output signals
5 OUT COM1 COMMON Common for pins 1 to 4 (OUT1～OUT4)
Table 3.9.12 List of output signals(TBOUT2)

pin No. (O*)
1 OUT17 O17 Wire stick check
2 OUT18 O18 Weld failure
3 OUT19 O19 Unit READY U1
4 OUT20 O20 Program end U1
6 OUT21 O21 Error U1
7 OUT22 O22 Interlock alarm U1
8 OUT23 O23 Alarm U1
9 OUT24 O24 Emergency stopped
11 OUT25 O25 In teach mode
12 OUT26 O26 Robot running U1
13 OUT27 O27 Ext. prg. sel enable
14 OUT28 O28 Ext. start enable
16 OUT29 O29 Motors energized
17 OUT30 O30 Status output 1
18 OUT31 O31 Work home position 1 U1
19 OUT32 O32 Information U1
3-57
3.9.3.2 Connections to Relay Unit Input Signals
INFO. For details on the electrical specifications for the input signals, see “section 3.9.1.2 Electrical
A connection example to relay unit input signals is shown below.

Both type of NPN and PNP power suppies can be selected by switchig CNSW.
Fig. 3.9.7 Input circuit of relay unit
3-58
Signal connection with external jigs

To input the relay unit, connect the output of relay dry contact or transistor as the diagram below.
Connection of relay dry contact Connection of transistor output Transistor (PNP) Output connections
(NPN). (Sink type (-) Common) (Sink type：(+) common)
Fig. 3.9.8 Signal connection with external jigs
Procedure to supply DC 24 V by external power source
Fig. 3.9.9 Procedure to supply DC 24 V by external power source
1 Check that shorting cables are connected to TBIN1 and TBIN2.
2 Disconnect the two TBIN1 and TBIN2 shorting cables.
3 Connect the external power supply input (24 V) and (0 V) pins to the pins shown in 3.
4 When a multiple number of relay units are used or 24 V is to be supplied elsewhere,

connect the 24 V output pin to the pin shown in 4.
3-59
3.9.3.3 Connections to Relay Unit Output Signals
INFO. For details on the electrical specifications of the output signals, see “3.9.1.3 Electrical
specifications of physical output” on page 3-49.
A connection example to relay unit output signals is shown below.
Be absolutely sure to use a surge killer for the load.

CAUTION
Fig. 3.9.10 Output circuit of relay unit
Internal and external power supplies can be used together since there is a separate common for every four input
circuits.
(Example)
Output O1-O4 O5-O8 O9-O12 O13-O16
Power source Internal Internal Internal External
3-60
3.9.4 I/O signal specifications of I/O board

Refer to the sections shown in Table 3.9.13 or Table 3.9.14 according to the DC24V supply
method. For details of the initial settings of signal allocations, refer to “4.6.2 Basic input signals”
and “4.6.3 Basic output signals”.
Table 3.9.13 External DC24V Power Supply
Connector Reference
I/O type
number
I/O signal specifications Connection procedure
Refer to Refer to
Input CNIN page 3-62 page 3-64
Table 3.9.15. the section 3.9.4.4.
Refer to Refer to
Output CNOUT page 3-63 page 3-65
Table 3.9.14 Internal DC24V Power Supply
Connector Reference
I/O type
number
I/O signal specifications Connection procedure
Refer to Refer to
Input CNIN page 3-66 page 3-68
Refer to Refer to
Output CNOUT page 3-67 page 3-69
3.9.4.1 Input signal connector CNIN of I/O board

This controller has 32 DC 24V input signals per an I/O board.
For general use input signals, the status input signal can be assigned freely.
This figure shows the connector (CNIN) pin layout as viewed from the soldered
surface. Con nector model: MR-50LM (by Honda Tsushin Kogyo)
Pin 33
Pin 50
HONDA
Pin 19
Pin 1 Pin 32
Pin 18
Fig. 3.9.11 Input signal connector pin layout
3.9.4.2 Output signal connector CNOUT of I/O board

This controller has 32 DC 24V output signals per an I/O board.
For general use output signals, the status output signal can be assigned freely.
This figure shows the connector (CNOUT) pin layout as viewed from the sol dered
surface. Con nector model: MR-50LF (by Ho nda Tsushin Kogyo)
Pin 1
Pin 18
HONDA
Pin 19
Pin 33 Pin 32
Pin 50
Fig. 3.9.12 Output signal connector pin layout
3-61
3.9.4.3 Connections to I/O board Input and output Signals (DC24V external power)
Note 1. Do not connect different power system signals to the same common. Doing so may
cause malfunctions.
Note 2. Do not connect wires to pins 28-32, and 42-50 of the connector.
CAUTION Note 3. When 2 or more I/O boards are used, use an external DC24V power supply.
Table 3.9.15 List of input signals (IO board 1 - CNIN ～ I/O board 3 – CNIN)
I/O board 1 - CNIN I/O board 2 – CNIN I/O board 3- CNIN
Connector Signal Function Signal Signal Function
pin No. Function allocated
name allocated as name name allocated as
as initial setting
(I*) initial setting (I*) (I*) initial setting
1 I1 I33 I65
2 I2 I34 I66
3 I3 General-purpose I35 General-purpose I67 General-purpose
4 I4 I36 I68
5 I5 input signals I37 input signals I69 input signals
6 I6 I38 I70
I1～I8 I33～I40 I65～72
7 I7 I39 I71
8 I8 I40 I72
Common for pins Common for pins Common for pins
9 Common 1 to 8 (I1～I8) Common 1 to 8 (I33～I40) Common 1 to 8 (I65～I72)
(Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1)
10 I9 I41 I73
11 I10 I42 I74
13 I12 I44 I76
15 I14 I46 I78
I9～I16 I41～I48 I73～I80
16 I15 I47 I79
17 I16 I48 I80
18 Common 10 to 17 (I9～ Common 10 to 17 (I41～I48) Common 10 to 17 (I73～
I16) (Note 1) (Note 1)
I80) (Note 1)
19 I17 I49 I81
20 I18 I50 I82
22 I20 I52 I84
24 I22 I54 I86
I17～I24 I49～I56 I81～I88
25 I23 I55 I87
26 I24 I56 I88
I88) (Note 1)
28～32 Not used (Note 2) Not used (Note 2) Not used (Note 2)
33 I25 I57 I89
34 I26 I58 I90
36 I28 I60 I92
38 I30 I62 I94
I25～I32 I57～I64 I89～I96
39 I31 I63 I95
40 I32 I64 I96
I96) (Note 1)
3-62
Table 3.9.16 List of output signals (IO board 1 - CNOUT ～ I/O board 3 – CNOUT)
I/O board 1 - CNOUT I/O board 2 - CNOUT I/O board 3- CNOUT
Connector Signal Function Signal Signal Function
pin No. Function allocated
name allocated as name name allocated as
as initial setting
(O*) initial setting (O*) (O*) initial setting
1 O1 O33 O65
2 O2 O34 O66
3 O3 General-purpose O35 General-purpose O67 General-purpose
4 O4 O36 O68
5 O5 Output signals O37 Output signals O69 Output signals
6 O6 O38 O70
O1～O8 O33～O40 O65～O72
7 O7 O39 O71
8 O8 O40 O72
9 Common 1 to 8 (O1～O8) Common 1 to 8 (O33～O40) Common 1 to 8 (O65～
(Note 1) (Note 1)
O72) (Note 1)
10 O9 O41 O73
11 O10 O42 O74
13 O12 O44 O76
15 O14 O46 O78
O9～O16 O41～O48 O73～O80
16 O15 O47 O79
17 O16 O48 O80
18 Common 10 to 17 (O9～ Common 10 to 17 (O41～ Common 10 to 17 (O73～
O16) (Note 1) O48) (Note 1) O80) (Note 1)
19 O17 O49 O81
20 O18 O50 O82
22 O20 O52 O84
24 O22 O54 O86
O17～O24 O49～O56 O81～O88
25 O23 O55 O87
26 O24 O56 O88
(Note 1)
O24) O56) (Note 1) O88) (Note 1)
33 O25 O57 O89
34 O26 O58 O90
36 O28 O60 O92
38 O30 O62 O94
O25～O32 O57～O64 O89～O96
39 O31 O63 O95
40 O32 O64 O96
O32) (Note 1) O64) (Note 1) O96) (Note 1)
3-63
3.9.4.4 Connections to I/O board Input Signals (DC24V external power)
INFO. For details on the electrical specifications for the internal signals, see “3.9.1.2 Electrical
The following example shows connections to the I/O Board input signals
Fig. 3.9.13 Input circuit of I/O board (When DC24V is supplied from external power)
3-64
3.9.4.5 Connections to the I/O Board Output Signals (DC24V external power)
INFO. For details on the electrical specifications of the output signals, see “3.9.1.3 Electrical
specifications of physical output” on pgae.3-49.
The following example shows connections to the I/O Board output signals
1. Be absolutely sure to use a surge killer for the load.

2. Do not use power with the wrong polarity.
CAUTION
Fig. 3.9.14 Output circuit of I/O board (When DC24V is supplied from external power)
3-65
3.9.4.6 I/O Board I/O Signal Specifications (DC24V internal power)

When only 1 I/O board is used, the internal power supply can be used.
Note 1. Do not connect different power system signals to the same common. Doing so may
cause malfunctions.
Note 2. Do not connect wires to pins 28-32, and 42-44 of the connector.
CAUTION Note 3. Do not connect external power to the internal power pin.
Table 3.9.17 List of input signals (IO board 1 - CNIN) (When internal power is used)
Connector pin Signal name
Function allocated as initial setting
No. (I*)
1 I1
2 I2
3 I3
4 I4 General-purpose input signals
5 I5
6 I6 I1～I8
7 I7
8 I8
9 Common Common for pins 1 to 8 (I1～I8) (Note 1)
10 I9
11 I10
12 I11
13 I12 General-purpose input signals 号
14 I13
15 I14 I9～I16
16 I15
17 I16
19 I17
20 I18
21 I19
23 I21
24 I22 I17～I24
25 I23
26 I24
28～32 Not used (Note 2)
33 I25
34 I26
35 I27
37 I29
38 I30 I25～I32
39 I31
40 I32
42-44 Not used (Note 2)
45-47 P1 Internal power source DC+24V (Note 3)
48-50 M1 Internal power source GND(0V) (Note 3)
3-66
Table 3.9.18 List of output signals (IO board 1 – CNOUT) (When internal power is used)
Connector pin Signal name
Function allocated as initial setting
No. (O*)
1 O1
2 O2
3 O3
4 O4 General-purpose Output signals
5 O5
6 O6 O1～O8
7 O7
8 O8
9 Common Common for pins 1 to 8 (O1～O8) (Note 1)
10 O9
11 O10
12 O11
14 O13
15 O14 O9～O16
16 O15
17 O16
19 O17
20 O18
21 O19
23 O21
24 O22 O17～O24
25 O23
26 O24
33 O25
34 O26
35 O27
37 O29
38 O30 O25～O32
39 O31
40 O32
45-47 P1 Internal power source DC+24V (Note 3)
48-50 M1 Internal power source GND(0V) (Note 3)
3-67
3.9.4.7 Connections to the I/O Board Input Signals (DC24V internal power)
● For details on the electrical specifications for the input signals, see “3.9.1.2 Electrical
INFO. specifications of physical input” on page 3-48.
● For details on the electrical specifications for the internal power supply, see “3.9.1.1
DC24V supplying procedure” on page 3-48.
Fig. 3.9.15 Input circuit of I/O board (When DC24V is supplied from internal power)
Internal and external power supplies can be used together since there is a separate common for every eight input
circuits.
(Example)
Input Power source
I1 ～ I8 Internal
I9 ～ I16 Internal
I17 ～ I24 Internal
I25 ～ I32 External
3-68
3.9.4.8 Connections to the I/O Board Output Signals (DC24V internal power)
● For details on the electrical specifications for the input signals, see “3.9.1.3 Electrical
INFO. specifications of physical output” on page 3-49.
● For details on the electrical specifications for the internal power supply, see “3.9.1.1
DC24V supplying procedure” on page 3-48.
Fig. 3.9.16 Output circuit of I/O board (When DC24V is supplied from external power)
Internal and external power supplies can be used together since there is a separate common for every eight
output circuits.
(Example)
Input Power source
O1 ～ O8 Internal
O9 ～ O16 Internal
O17 ～ O24 Internal
O25 ～ O32 External
3-69
NOTE
3-70
Chapter 4 Setup
This chapter describes the preparations performed up to the stage where teaching can be
performed for the robot. Setting the tool length and weight and allocating the I/O signals for
connection with the peripheral devices are absolutely essential when the robot is to be used.
Acquire a thorough understanding of the information contained in this chapter and proceed with the
setup.
4.1 How to read “Chapter 4 Setup” ....................................................................................... 4-1

4.2 Configuration .................................................................................................................. 4-2
4.3 Mounting a tool ............................................................................................................... 4-3
4.3.1 Mounting a tool (SRA166-01) ................................................................................. 4-3
4.3.2 Mounting a tool (NV6/NV6L/NV20)......................................................................... 4-4
4.3.3 Performing encoder reset and encoder correction ................................................. 4-5
4.4 User load (service load) setting .................................................................................... 4-11
4.5 Tool constant settings ................................................................................................... 4-13
4.5.1 Tool name............................................................................................................. 4-14
4.5.2 Tool length ............................................................................................................ 4-15
4.5.3 Tool angle ............................................................................................................. 4-20
4.5.4 Center of gravity (COG) and weight of tool .......................................................... 4-21
4.5.5 Tool’s moment of inertia ....................................................................................... 4-26
4.5.6 Max, radius of tool ................................................................................................ 4-33
4.5.7 Tool length and angles of Daihen’s arc welding torch........................................... 4-34
4.5.8 Tool conversion .................................................................................................... 4-39
4.6 Signal attribute settings................................................................................................. 4-41
4.6.1 Standard signal attributes assignment.................................................................. 4-42
4.6.2 Standard input signals .......................................................................................... 4-43
4.6.3 Standard output signals........................................................................................ 4-45
4.6.4 How to copy the I/O settings between the controllers........................................... 4-50
4.7 Concerning the qualifications of the operators.............................................................. 4-55
4.7.1 Operation qualifications........................................................................................ 4-55
4.7.2 Procedure for changing the operator qualifications .............................................. 4-56
4.7.3 How to change the passwords ............................................................................. 4-57
4.7.4 How to set the operator qualifications class at power-on ..................................... 4-58
4.8 I/O area mapping function............................................................................................. 4-59
4.8.1 I/O area mapping.................................................................................................. 4-59
4.8.2 Relation with software PLC .................................................................................. 4-62
4.8.3 Setting method ..................................................................................................... 4-63
4.8.4 Example 1 : Using only field bus as external I/O signals with PLC disconnected. 4-65
4.8.5 Example 2: Using only I/O board 1 – field bus CH1 with PLC disconnected ........ 4-66
4.8.6 Example 3: Forcibly inputting / outputting signals of I/O board 1 as I1-I32 with PLC
enabled 4-67
4.9 High Speed Interference Detection ............................................................................... 4-68
4.9.1 Outline of High Speed Interference Detection ...................................................... 4-68
4.9.2 Applied machine types ......................................................................................... 4-68

4.9.3 Parameters that must be set in advance to use this function ............................... 4-68
4.9.4 “Interference setting” screen ................................................................................ 4-69
4.9.5 Switching Detection Level by Function................................................................. 4-70
4.9.6 As for the mistake in interference detection.......................................................... 4-70
4.9.7 Trouble shooting................................................................................................... 4-70
4.10 Setting the application type........................................................................................... 4-71
4.11 Setting the [CLAMP / ARC] key .................................................................................... 4-73
4.12 Setting the software limit (operating range) .................................................................. 4-75
4.12.1 Outline.................................................................................................................. 4-75
4.12.2 [Position record] screen settings .......................................................................... 4-76
4.13 User defined error ......................................................................................................... 4-77
4.14 User coordinate system ................................................................................................ 4-78
4.14.1 Setting example.................................................................................................... 4-78
4.14.2 Stationary tool....................................................................................................... 4-81
4.15 How to copy the softkey settings between the controllers............................................. 4-84
4.15.1 Exporting the setting file ....................................................................................... 4-84
4.15.2 Importing the setting file ....................................................................................... 4-86
4.1 How to read “Chapter 4 Setup”
4.1 How to read “Chapter 4 Setup”

In chapter 4, the outline of the basic setup work (From the robot installation to the start of the teaching work) is
described. Perform the setup procedures by referring to the flow chart shown as below
START
Power ON Refer to the instruction manual

Motors ON "BASIC OPERATIONS MANUAL",
Installing a tool 4.3 Mounting a tool
Adjusting the reference position 4.3.3 Performing encoder

of each robot axis reset and encoder correction
If A-TRAC is installed after the shipping
A-TRAC settings
Refer to the respective
“A-TRAC” manuals
The "tool constants" refer to a set of
parameters including the length, angle, Set the tool constants 4.5 Tool constant settings
center of gravity, weight and moment of The settings can be done easily by
inertia of the installed tool. These - When using arc welding torch of
using
parameters are extremely important for DAIHEN; “4.5.7 Tool length and
angles of Daihen’s arc welding torch”
ensuring precise linear operations and
- When a servo gun is installed
appropriate acceleration / deceleration
when being shipped; the tool
control. Therefore, do not forget to set menu. setting is already finished.
these parameters.
This is a procedure in which the I/O 4.6 Standard signal attributes

signals to be used are assigned. When assignment
using the robot with a default setting, it Setup the
is not necessary to change the settings. input / output signals When using software PLC, refer to
the operating manual “Software
PLC”
To use the robot safely, adjust the

4.9 High Speed Interference
sensitivity of the interference detection.
Setup the robot so that it can Detection
And, the software limit should be
changed when the mechanical stopper be used safely 4.12 Setting the software limit
position is changed. (operating range)
Optimizing the layout of the f-keys and

4.10 Setting the application
assigning the exclusive key for the
application type. When using the robot
Optimizing the operation key type
with a default setting, it is not necessary settings 4.11 Setting the [CLAMP /
to change the settings. ARC] key
END
Now the basic setup work is finished. Please start the teaching operation.
In case of spot welding / arc welding applications, proceed with the setup work for respective applications by
referring to respective “APPLICATION MANUAL“.
Fig. 4.1.1 Overview of basic setup work
4-1
4.2 Configuration
4.2 Configuration
The mechanical system configuration (such as the mechanism model settings, unit configuration definition,
encoder correction settings, and operating range settings) and operability configuration (such as the display
language settings, application settings, and function key layout) have been shipped from the factory in the
optimum condition for the status of the system purchased.
Since there is normally no need for customer to change these settings, simply proceed to the next section.
4-2
4.3 Mounting a tool
4.3 Mounting a tool

In this section, a tool will be installed to the flange surface of the robot wrist. Depending on the intended
application, the tool may be a spot welding gun, arc welding torch, material handling gripper or sealing nozzle
gun.
4.3.1 Mounting a tool (SRA166-01)

When a tool is to be installed, it need not necessarily point straight up or straight down. However, confirm that,
by operating the 6th axis (tip axis), the tool reaches the proposed range.
Flange to
install tool
Spot welding gun
Fig. 4.3.1 Installing a tool (Spot welding gun)
For the layout of the installation bolt holes and other detailed specifications, refer to the figure below.
The installation area differs from one robot model to another. Details are provided in the instruction manual
"MANIPULATOR MANUAL" of the model concerned, and so refer to them.
Fig. 4.3.2 Detailed outline drawings of tool installation area
The depth to which the tool (end effector) installation bolts are to be screwed in must be
less than the depth of the threads in the tool installation surface. The wrist may be
CAUTION damaged if the bolts are screwed in beyond the depth of the threads.
4-3
4.3 Mounting a tool
4.3.2 Mounting a tool (NV6/NV6L/NV20)

When a tool is to be installed, it need not necessarily point straight up or straight down. However, confirm that,
by operating the J6 axis (tip axis), the tool reaches the proposed range.
The figure below shows a case where an arc welding torch is used.
Welding torch
Fig. 4.3.3 Mounting the tools
For the layout of the installation bolt holes and other detailed specifications, refer to the figure below.
The mounting area may be different with some robot models. For further details, refer to the instruction manual
"MANIPULATOR MANUAL" of the manipulator concerned.
Fig. 4.3.4 Detailed outline drawings of tool installation area (NV6/NV6L/NV20)
Be absolutely sure to set the screw-in depth of the tool (end effector) mounting bolts to a
depth which is less than that of the threads in the mounting surface of the tool.
CAUTION The wrist may be damaged if the bolts are screwed in beyond the depth of the threads.
4-4
4.3 Mounting a tool
4.3.3 Performing encoder reset and encoder correction
Encoder reset procedure is to initialize the position data in encoder and Encoder
correction procedure is to determine the reference position of robot axes. Thus these
procedures are very important.
After mounting a tool on robot by customer, perform these procedures only when
necessary, by referring to the following explanation.
When performing, these procedures must be done before beginning the teaching
IMPORTANT operation. If the encoder correction is performed after the teaching operation has been
finished, the reference position of each axis may change, so the work programs may not
be able to be played in correct position.
Also these procedures are necessary when motor, encoder or robot body is replaced. In
such case, perform these procedures by referring to the following explanation.
Cases when encoder correction is necessary
・ Robot that uses "Zeroing pin and block” (SRA and or so) .. As for the heavy load robot, perform
encoder correction for all axis after mounting a tool. Always perform encoder correction with same
conditions (load conditions and robot posture). So "Reference pose" in which the all axes are set to
the reference position with zeroing pin etc. is recommended as the robot posture to perform this. And,
if the tool is replaced to one that has different mass or different COG (Center of Gravity), please do not
forget to perform the encoder correction for the all axes again. Because in a case like that, the load
balance of the robot will change and the encoder correction values (offset values) for the all axes may
change.
・ Robot that uses "Origin adjusting match-mark" (NV6 and or so) .. After mounting a tool, perform
encoder correction only when the reference pose check program (P9999) does not provide the
position where all the origin adjusting match-marks are in alignment.
・ When encoder reset is performed, encoder correction must be performed without fail.
Cases when encoder reset is necessary
・ When motor, reduction gear, encoder or robot body has been replaced
・ When connector to the encoder or connector to the encoder charging battery has been disconnected
・ When the following errors have occurred:

・E0030 Encoder absolute data failure
・E0031 Motor rotation too fast when turning Motors ON
・E0050 Encoder counter overflow/underflow
・E0052 Encoder battery charge low
・E0055 Motor rotation too fast when power off
・E0057 Encoder count status failure
・I1016 Manipulator battery warning
・I4905 Playback was started in the state that the basic posture of any axes is not setup.
・ Concerning the detailed procedures of the encoder reset and the encoder correction
for the additional axes, please refer to the respective instruction manuals. In case of a
servo gun, refer to the instruction manual "SERVO GUN ADJUSTMENT
PROCEDURE FOR EXPERTS".
・ In case of arc welding robots, option parts (e.g. tip gauge, gauge ASSY, torch gauge
INFO. ASSY etc.) to check the welding torch distortion or the change of the robot reference
position are available. For details, refer to the instruction manual "MANIPULATOR
MANUAL”
・ (This procedure is provided to several limited robots) To improve the position accuracy
of the TCP (Tool Center Point), please modify the encoder correction values by
referring to "More accurate encoder correction" of the instruction manual
"MANIPULATOR MANUAL" of each robot, after performing normal encoder correction.
Reference position (zeroing position) is the axis position where "Origin adjusting
match-mark" matches or “Zeroing pin” can be inserted. When all axes are in reference
position (zero position), it is called reference pose (zeroing pose). Please refer to the
IMPORTANT instruction manual "MANIPULATOR MANUAL" for detail. (Fig. 4.3.5 and Fig. 4.3.6 is just
for reference)
4-5
4.3 Mounting a tool
Moving to the Mechanical reference pose and selecting the menu items
教示再生
TEACH PLAYBACK 1 Select the teach mode.
運転準備
MOTOR ON 2 Turn on the servo power supply.
3 Perform manual operations in such a way that all the robot's axes are aligned with the
reference positions.
(A robot posture in which the all axes are set to the reference positions is called
"Reference pose")
>>For an example of a robot that uses "Origin adjusting match-mark" , refer to Fig. 4.3.5
>>For an example of a robot that uses "Zeroing pin" , refer to Fig. 4.3.6
The reference pose differs from each other. For details, refer to the instruction manual
"MANIPULATOR MANUAL" of each robot.
4 Open <Constant Setting> - [3 Machine Constants] - [4 Encoder Correction].
Now proceed with the encoder reset and encoder correction operations. (These are
described on the next and subsequent pages.)
The screen that appears when the menu is selected is the screen on which the encoder
correction is performed. The encoder correction or encoder reset operation is selected
on this screen.
4-6
4.3 Mounting a tool
Encoder Reset procedure

1 To reset the encoder, press f9 <Encoder Reset>.
>>The encoder reset screen is selected.
2 To reset a specific axis only for replacing a motor, for instance, select the axis, and press
＋ [ENABLE] + [1].
>>A check mark appears for the selected axis.
＋ To release the selected axis, press [ENABLE] + [2].
3 To reset all the axes at once, press f8 <All Select>.

>> All the axes are selected, and check marks appear for them.
The selected status can be released by pressing f8 <All Release>.
4 When the axis to be reset is selected, press f12 <Execute>.

If the robot axes are not equipped with a brake, press f12 <Execute> while keeping the
servo power on. (If all the axes of the robot are equipped with a brake, this operation may
be performed with the servo power off.)
>>If the encoder reset is successfully finished, a message to show the result will appear.
4-7
4.3 Mounting a tool
Encoder Correction procedure

1 Upon completion of the encoder resetting, proceed with the encoder correction.
Press f9 <Encoder Correct>.
>> The screen which appeared immediately after [3 Machine Constants] [4 Encoder
Correction] were selected is restored.
2 Either "Data Input" or "Position Record" can be used as the method for encoder
correction.
Correction
Details
method
Position In this screen, the mechanical position is regarded as a reference

Record position for the axis when [Enter] and [REC] keys are pressed and
then the encoder correction value is calculated and set.
Select this method at a production process or when a motor or
mechanism is to be replaced. Be absolutely sure to perform the
operations with the robot placed in a posture where the all axes are
aligned to the "reference position".
The correction value is input by pressing
[Enter] followed by [REC]. (These values are
input for each axis.)
Angle (deg.) of each axis
Encoder value (in hexadecimal

notation) after correction
Data Input Use this method when the encoder correction values are already
known.
An "encoder correction value which is already known" is a
post-mastering encoder correction value which is provided inside
the controller when the robot is shipped from the factory.
Therefore, cases where this screen is used to set the values after
shipment are as follows;
• When the encoder battery has been replaced
• After the controller's memory has been formatted
When these values are input, it is acceptable for the robot to be in
any position and any posture.
The encoder correction value is
input (in decimal notation) here.
Angle (deg.) of each axis
Encoder value (in decimal

notation) after correction
4-8
4.3 Mounting a tool
3 The "Position Record" method is described here.

Press f8 <Record Position>.
>>The screen now changes.
4 After confirming that the axis is mechanically aligned to the reference position, align the
cursor with the axis whose encoder is to be corrected, and press [Enter] followed by
[REC].
If the robot axes are not equipped with a brake, press [Enter] and [REC] while keeping
the servo power ON ([ENABLE SWITCH]). (If all the axes of the robot are equipped with
a brake, this operation may be performed with the servo power OFF.)
* Encoder correction cannot be implemented for all the axes together so repeat these
operations for each axis in turn.
5 At this stage, the encoder correction values are still not saved in the memory.
To save them, first turn the motor power OFF (by pressing [EMERGENCY STOP
BUTTON]).
Then press f12 <Complete>.
If "Reference position check program". is not recorded in memory, it is recommended to

INFO. record this "Reference pose" (a pose in which the all axes are aligned to the reference
positions) to program 9999 as a "Reference position check program". This program is
convenient to check if the all axes of the robot are correctly set to the reference position
respectively.
This work includes some jobs that should be conducted with the motors ON.
Consequently, be sure to conduct the work at least by a pair of two persons. One person
must stay on guard to press an Emergency Stop button at any time, while the other
person must promptly finish the work with thorough attention paid to the robot operating
WARNING area. Furthermore, prior to starting the work, check for safe corridors. If this procedure is
omitted, operator may be caught or sandwiched by the robot parts, possibly resulting in
death or serious injury.
As for the robot using “Zeroing pin and block”, check to be sure that the zeroing pin has
been removed and then operate the robot. Note that operating the robot with the zeroing
pin inserted may bend the pin or deform the hole for this pin, thus disabling proper
CAUTION positioning of the zeroing pin.
4-9
4.3 Mounting a tool
Axis 4 Matchmarks Axis 1 Matchmarks
Axis 3 Matchmarks Axis 6 Matchmarks
Axis 2 Matchmarks
Axis 5 Matchmarks
Fig. 4.3.5 Origin Adjusting Match-mark Positions (NV6/NV6L/NV20)
Fig. 4.3.6 A Pose to insert the zeroing pin (J1,J2 and J3 axis of SRA166-01)
4-10
4.4 User load (service load) setting

If additional loads except for the end effector (tool) are installed on the robot, please set the parameters of the
loads (C of G, mass and moment of inertia) based on the coordinate system like the picture shown as the
follows in advance.
J3 user load +X
Installation area
+Z +Y
J3
J2 user load
Installation area
+X
+Z J1 user load
+Y
Installation area
J2
+Z
J1
+X +Y
+Y +X
+Z +Y
J3 J3
+X +X
+Z +Y
J2 J2
+Z +Z
J1 +Y +X J1
Fig. 4.4.1 Reference coordinate systems of the user load (An example of SRA166-01)
4-11
Open <Constant Setting> - [3 Machine Constants] - [2 Service load].

Input the respective parameters and press f12<Complete> to save those parameters.
Table 4.4.1 Service load (It is possible to define up to 2 service loads for J1,J2 and J3 axis respectively)
Parameter name Setting value

Set the coordinates (x,y,z) of the center of gravity of the load based on
C of G (mm) each coordinate system
(unit is mm)
Set the weight of the service load
Weight (kg)
(unit is kg)
Set the moment of the inertia.(unit is kgm2)
After setting the C of G and the Weight , it is possible to set the inertia of
Inertia (kgm2)
the service load easily by inputting the approximate shape (a,b,c) in mm
(To use this function, press f key <Easy Setting>)
+Z
Size of Y direction a Coordinate system
+X To define service
Size of Z direction load position
COG
b
(x,y,z)
Size of X direction +Y
c
Fig. 4.4.2 COG position and size of service load
Same as the COG and weight setting of tool, service load setting is also important.
Wrong setting may cause the fatal damage on machine.
CAUTION
Excessive service load over the specification of robot can not be attached.
CAUTION
4-12
4.5 Tool constant settings

The “tool constants” refer to a set of parameters including the length, angle, center of gravity, weight and
moment of inertia of the installed tool. These parameters are extremely important for ensuring precise linear
operations and appropriate acceleration/deceleration control. Before moving the robot, read carefully through
the instructions in this section and take the steps described without fail. Tool constants for up to 32 tools can be
stored in this controller’s memory. If an application involves the use of a multiple number of tools, perform the
settings for all the tools concerned.
Continued use under the wrong settings for the center of gravity, weight and tool’s
moment of inertia may fatally damage the machine. Perform the settings set forth in this
section without fail.
CAUTION The settings must be performed even for small and/or lightweight tools. The same
settings used for a large tool cannot be used for a small tool.
CAUTION Sample of A-TRAC

In case of a robot with A-TRAC, start the setting for the tool after setting of A-TRAC.
(Normally, A-TRAC setting is finished when the robot is shipped)
For details, please refer the respective instruction manual of “A-TRAC”.
Table 4.5.1 Tool constants

Tool constants
A name can be set for each of the tools. A tool name may consist of not more
Name than 16 alphanumerics and symbols. (Japanese characters cannot be used.)
This constant is the length up to the tool tip in the TCP coordinate system (X, Y
and Z components of the tool tip). It is absolutely necessary in order to ensure
MANDATORY Length precise linear movements.
When the tool length automatic setting function is used, the tool length can
be ascertained automatically using the already created program.
This constant is for setting the inclination of the tool tip in the TCP coordinate
system using the X, Y and Z axis rotation components. It proves useful since,
MANDATORY
Angle when teaching, the tool can be operated manually in the direction in which it is
pointing. When the tool angle simple setting function is used, the tool angle
can be set easily.
This constant is for setting the tool's center of gravity position in the TCP
coordinate system and its weight. It is required in order to ensure appropriate
Center of gravity acceleration/deceleration control.
MANDATORY (COG) The constant is set using the tool center of gravity (COG) and weight
And weight automatic setting function. (The weight of a tool cannot be input manually.)
This constant is for setting the moment of inertia around the center of gravity in
the TCP
Moment of inertia coordinate system using the X, Y and Z components. It must be set if the
MANDATORY
moment of inertia has exceeded the allowable value.
When the tool moment of inertia simple setting function is used, the
moment of inertia can be set easily by designating the tool shape.
Maximum rotation This constant is the max. radius of the tool. It is used to check the territory, etc.
radius
4-13
Common operating procedure for setting tool constants

(With the exception of the tool weight, all of the tool constants are set on the same screen shown below.)
1 Select the teach mode.
2 Select <Constant Setting>- [3 Machine constants] - [1 Tool constants].

>>The tool constant input screen resembling the one shown below now appears.
3 Align the cursor with the desired position, input a number (such as 1), and then
press the [Enter] key.
4 To change the tool number, press the page up or down key.
5 Upon completion of the settings, press the <Complete> key. The settings are
now saved in the constant file.
>>Operation returns to the machine constant menu screen.
4.5.1 Tool name

With an application which involves the use of a multiple number of tools, the parameters become more
comprehensible if the welding gun or torch name and model, for instance, are registered here first.
It is not required to set the tool name. The initial setting may be used as is. (Initial setting: TOOL* where “*” is
the tool number)
The tool name does not appear on the programs display screen.
A tool name may consist of not more than 16 alphanumerics and symbols.
Refer to the instruction manual "BASIC OPERATIONS MANUAL"
4-14
4.5.2 Tool length
Wrist coordinate
Coordinate system system
defined on tool
installation surface
+X
+Y
+Z
Tool tip
Tool length
(X component)
+Z Tool length The operations involved will be facilitated if the
+Y (Z component) upward direction of the tool is set as the Z (up)
direction and its forward direction is set as the
X (forward) direction since these are the
directions used with the robot coordinates.
Tool coordinate Define the tool coordinate system by rotating
system the wrist coordinate system in such a way that
+X the above is achieved.
Fig. 4.5.1 Illustration of tool length and angle
The tool length is the coordinates of the X, Y and Z component of the tool tip in the wrist coordinate system.
Similarly, the tool angle expresses the inclination of the tool tip in the wrist coordinate system as the angle
of rotation around the X, Y and Z axes. The coordinate system defined by these parameters is called the
tool coordinate.
In the wrist coordinate system, the center of the tool installation surface serves as the zero point, and the
direction in which this surface is pointing serves as the Z direction as is shown above.
Measure the tool length which was measured in accordance with the definition given above, and input it.
However, if the tool dimensions are not known or high-accuracy interpolation operations are required by a
material handling application, for instance, use instead the method which automatically measures the tool
length.
For the tool length automatic setting function described next to be used, the basic teaching and
playback check jobs must be performed. Since these jobs cannot be done if the "BASIC OPERATIONS
MANUAL" has not yet been read, do not set the tool length but use the initial setting as is and continue until
the end of the setup is reached.
After reading the Basic Operations Manual, proceed with this setting again.
4-15
Setting the toll length automatically

Although one program for calculating the tool length must be taught, the tool length can then be set
automatically simply by taking this preparatory step.
It does not matter whether the tool angle has already been set or not.
1 First, the programs for setting the tool length automatically must be taught.
Teach the kind of programs where the tip of the installed tool (install a tool with
a sharp tip here as well) is aimed in a number of different postures at a sharp
tip which has been secured to the ground. The required number of steps is at
least 10.
Tool tip
Sharp tip fixed on

the ground
Ensure that the posture of the robot varies significantly with each of the steps, and
that its aim is as accurate as possible. This holds the key for ensuring a high
accuracy.
Record all the steps with linear interpolation ON. (Although it has nothing to do with
calculating the tool length, this comes in handy in when checking the results in 7.)
2 On the tool constant setting screen for the desired tool number, press the
<Easy Setting> key.
>>The tool length automatic setting screen such as the one shown below now
appears.
3 If any other screen has appeared, press the <Length Set> key.
4 Select the setting type. Select "Axis Constants & Length" or "Length only"
＋ using the [ENABLE] and [Left/right cursor] keys.
Normally, "Length only" is selected.
Select "Axis Constants & Length" only when more accurate length setting is required.
In this case, the axis constants of J2, J3, J4 and J5 axes are corrected automatically.
(The axis constants of all the other axes remain unaffected.)
(The axis to be compensated differs depending on the mechanism type.)
5 Align the cursor with the program No., input the program No. (such as 1) that
was created previously in 1, and press the [Enter] key.
6 Press the <Execute> key.
4-16
7 The tool length is calculated, and the results appear as follows a few moments
later.
>>The maximum error expresses the accuracy of the tool length which has been
calculated. The lower the value here, the higher the resulting accuracy of the tool
length which has been calculated.
The errors at each step up to a maximum of 10 steps are displayed simultaneously.
If the results in 9 below are not satisfactory, simply proceed to modify the position in
sequence starting with the step with the highest value.
If satisfactory results have been obtained, select [Yes] on the pop-up window,
and press [Enter] key.
>>At this stage, only the display is updated, and the data is not yet stored in the
constant file.
9 Upon completion of the settings, check them.

Exit the constant menu and try check go/back of program taught in 1.
＋
Tool tip
Sharp tip fixed on

the ground
If, unlike the movements which resulted when the program was first taught, the tool
tip hardly moves at all from the sharp tip secured to the ground even during
operations between the steps, then the tool length has been set successfully.
When pressing <Complete> key, following message will appear. If programs are already
taught and these are not to be modified, please select [NO].
CAUTION
4-17
Tool Length Automatic Setting (2-point tool length setting)

In order to easily set a new tool length when the shape of a tool is deformed, 2-point tool length setting
function is prepared. In the case where the torch interferes during operation, or the torch is changed with a
new one, be sure to use this function. By use of this function, the tool length after deformation is automatically
calculated. It is necessary to teach the task program before and after tool deformation as a calculation
program in advance.
1 First, it is necessary to teach the task program with the tool before deformation.
Carry out teaching (1 step) the task program which the attached tool tip (to
which a sharp end portion is attached too) is likely to target, to the sharp end
fixed to the ground.
Tool tip before

deformation
Sharp tip fixed

on the ground
2 Next, it is necessary to teach the task program with the tool after deformation.
Carry out teaching (1 step) the task program in the same manner as in the
above 1.
>>Set the tool posture same as that taught in the above 1.
Tool tip before

deformation
Sharp tip fixed

on the ground
3 In the tool constant setting screen of the desired tool number, press the <Easy
setting> key.
>>The 2-point teaching tool length automatic setting screen is displayed as shown
below.
4 If a different screen is displayed, press the <2-Point Length Set> key.
5 Move the cursor on the program of the reference point before conversion, and
input the program number prepared in the above 1 (for example, No.1), and
press [Enter] key.
6 Move the cursor on the step of the reference point before conversion, and input
the step number prepared in the above 1 (for example, No.1), and press [Enter]
key.
4-18
7 Input the program of the reference point after conversion, the program number
prepared in step 2, and the step number in the same manner as in the above 5
and 6.
8 Press <Execute> key.
9 The tool length is calculated, and after a while, the result is displayed as shown
below.
If it is all right, select [OK] on the popup window, and press [Enter] key.
>> At that time, only the display is updated, and the tool length is not stored in the
constant file yet.
10 After the setting, press <Complete> key. The set contents are stored into the
constant file.
>> The screen goes back to the machine constant menu screen.
11 When the tool constants are changed, following pop-up window will be
displayed.
When the taught position for the robot in the taught program should be shifted
according to the modified tool constants, select [YES] and press [Enter] key.
>>It goes back to the tool shifting operation.
page4.5.8『Tool 』
When the program should not be shifted, select “NO” and press “Enter” key.
4-19
4.5.3 Tool angle

The operations involved will be facilitated if the upward direction of the tool is set as the Z (up) direction and its
forward direction is set as the X (forward) direction since these are the directions used with the robot
coordinates. The tool angle is what defines the tool coordinate so that this is achieved. The tool angle is
referenced only by the operation direction when manual operations are performed with the tool coordinate and
by [Service: Program Conversion: XYZ shift]. Since all other operations and the path used during playback are
not affected in any way, the initial setting (0 degrees for all directions) may be used as is.
However, if a servo gun (servo-driven spot welding gun) requiring bending compensation control for the gun
arm (in the arm direction) is used, the tool angle directly determines the direction of the bending compensation
and so must be set.
Since it is often difficult to measure the tool angle, the following simple setting function has been provided.
Follow the setting procedure below.
Simply setting the tool angle

1 On the tool constant setting screen for the desired tool number, press the <Easy
Setting> key.
>>The tool angle simple setting screen such as the one shown below now appears.
2 If any other screen has appeared, press the <Angle Set> key.
3 As per the guide picture, visually align the upward direction of the tool with the
Z (up) direction of the robot and its forward direction with the X (forward)
direction of the robot.
5 The tool angle is calculated form the posture, and the result is displayed.
The angle of rotation is now calculated so that the tool upward direction in the
tool coordinate system is set to the Z (up) direction and its forward direction is
set to the X (forward) direction.
If this is satisfactory, select [Yes] on the pop-up window, and press the [Enter]
key.
constant file.
7 Upon completion of the settings, check them. Exit the constant menu and, in
the teach mode, select the tool coordinates and try performing manual
operations.
If the tool is now moved in the up/down direction by the Z key and in the front/back
direction by the X key, then the tool angle has been set successfully.
4-20
4.5.4 Center of gravity (COG) and weight of tool
The tool center of gravity (COG) and weight are parameters required to exercise
the appropriate acceleration/deceleration control.
After installing all the tools, arm loads, etc., it is absolutely necessary to set the tool
CAUTION center of gravity and weight.
The tool weight cannot be input manually on the tool constant setting screen. This is to avoid the danger of
seriously damaging the machine which would result if a weight which is considerably different from the actual
weight were to have been set by mistake. At the factory, the value of the rated conveyable weight was set.
(The tool center of gravity can be input.)
Therefore, this controller can automatically calculate the correct values for the center of gravity (COG) and
weight of tool. Use this convenient function to set the center of gravity (COG) and weight of tool.
For the tool center of gravity and weight setting function described next to be used, the basic teaching
and playback check jobs must be performed. Since these jobs cannot be done if the Basic Operations Manual
has not yet been read, do not set the center of gravity (COG) and weight of tool but use the initial settings as is
and continue until the end of the setup is reached.
After reading the Basic Operations Manual, proceed with these settings again without fail.
Setting the center of gravity (COG) and weight of tool automatically

Operate the robot in a predetermined manner, calculate the torque generated from the current at this time,
and use the measured value as a basis to calculate the center of gravity (COG) and weight of tool. Although
one program for sampling the current must be taught, the center of gravity (COG) and weight of tool can then
be set simply by playing back the program.
For this procedure, the operator must be qualified as an EXPERT or above.

page4-55『4.7Concerning the qualifications of the operators』
(1) Create the program for measuring the center of gravity (COG) and weight of tool
2 First, the program for the center of gravity (COG) and weight of tool setting
function must be taught. Select [Automatic COG Setting] from <Service
Utilities>.
>>An automatic center of gravity setting screen such as the one shown below now
appears.
3 Select [Program creation] from the menu items.

>>The program creation screen for the auto tool load center setting such as the one
shown below now appears.
4-21
4 First, align the cursor with the program No., input here the number of a program
which is not currently being used, and press the [Enter] key.
>>This is the number of the program which will now be created for automatically
setting the center of gravity (COG) and weight of tool. An unused number must be
specified here without fail.
＋ It is also possible to input a comment directly from this setting screen.
Align the cursor with the comment field, and press the [ENABLE] + [EDIT] keys.
The soft keyboard appears so that a comment can be registered.
5 Switch on the motor power, and use the axis operating keys to operate the robot
and set it to a posture in which an unbalanced torque (load resulting from the
effect of the gravity) is applied to the J3, J5 and J6 axes.
>>The posture shown in the figure below, for instance, is ideal. At this time, any
posture may be assumed for the J1 and J2 axes. The torque of each axis is displayed
as a bar graph on the torque monitor at the bottom right of the screen. A posture in
which the bar graph is the longest for the J3, J5 and J6 axes is the ideal one. However,
pay particular attention to the resulting movements of the cables since a posture in
which tension is applied to the application cable or which causes the cables to rub
against the robot body will adversely affect the accuracy.
The Torque monitor (bar graph) displays the torque as a ratio to the stalling current of
each axis motor. The higher is this ratio, the greater will be the unbalanced torque
which is applied and the better suited will be the posture to the automatic center of
gravity (COG) and weight of tool settings.
6 Align the cursor with the Pose 1 field, and press the [Enter] key and [O.WRITE/
REC] key.
>>The first posture (Pose 1) is now registered. The angle data loaded for the axes is
displayed as shown below.
7 Next, make a major change to the posture. At this time, change the wrist posture
as much possible.
Pose 1
Pose 2
While unbalance torque is given to J3
and J6 axis, shake J5 axis up and
down to make two poses.
4-22
8 Align the cursor with the Pose 2 field, and press [Enter] key and [REC] key.
>>The first posture (Pose 2) is now registered. The angle data loaded for the axes is
9 This completes the registration of two of the points required. Press the f12
<Execute> key.
>>Based on the two postures registered in this way, the program shown below
consisting of a multiple number of steps for initiating the automatic center of gravity
(COG) and weight of tool settings is now generated automatically. The program No.
which is automatically generated at this time is the one which was specified in 4.
1 Comment data
2 Pose 1 point
3 Point where J6 axis is positioned when it has moved by 10 degrees
4 Pose 1 point
6 Pose 1 point
8 Pose 1 point
9 Pose 2 point
11 Pose 2 point
13 Pose 2 point
15 Pose 2 point
16 END instruction
>>Upon completion of the automatic generation of the program, the following pop-up
message is displayed. Press any key.
The poses (robot positions) were recorded directly by following the instructions set forth above, but an
alternative to this is to teach a program in which these positions have been recorded ahead of time, and
then call that program.
Since a program can be used over and over again once it has been taught, this method is preferable in
cases such as a tool change application where the work involved in setting the center of gravity and weight
will be repeated for a number of different types of tools.
10 First, record the program in which two positions are included.

The same precautions described above apply to the robot positions and
postures. The interpolation type, speed, accuracy, tool numbers, etc. may be
disregarded at this point. Only the positions are referenced.
11 Press the f8 <Refer> key without recording poses 1 (or 2) in 5 to 8.

>>A dialog box shown below is displayed. Input the program number prepared in
above step, and press [Enter] key.
12 First two move steps are loaded from the program, and the angle data of each
axis is displayed.
>>Even when functions were recorded in the program, they’re ignored. Only the move
command will be picked up.
13 The procedure is now the same as in 9.
4-23
(2) Executing the center of gravity (COG) and weight of tool settings
14 Finally, measure the center of gravity (COG) and weight of tool.

“The program for measuring the center of gravity (COG) and weight of tool”
which was created before must now be played back.
First, switch to the playback mode.
Select the single cycle mode with 100% speed override.
15 Select [Automatic COG setting] from <Service Utilities> as before, and then
select [Tool COG Measurement].
>>The screen for executing the automatic tool COG setting such as the one shown
below appears.
16 Input the number of the program for measuring the center of gravity (COG) and
weight of tool in the “Program” item.
Input the tool number (1 to 32) to be measured in the “Tool No.” item.
>>When the tool number is input, the center of gravity position (mm or inches) and
weight (kg) of that tool which are currently registered in the constants are displayed.
17 In some cases such as when a new spot welding gun is used, the tool weight is
already known. In such a case, align the [Tool weight setup] item with
<Specifies> and set the known tool weight in kilograms in the "Mass" input field.
Normally, the item is aligned with <Auto calculation>.
18 When J3 axis carries a load such as a valve box and its center of gravity
position and weight are known, input up to two of these values in the <Service
load setup> field.
>>If the service load is not known, there is no need to set it. The center of gravity
(COG) and weight of tool setting function measures the tool and service load together
(as if the load were concentrated on the tool).
If service load is set beforehand, those data is displayed. Please refer to “4.4 User
load (service load) setting” for detail.
19 Press the f12 <Execute> key.
>>"Waiting" appears as the execution status. This indicates the status in which the
playback operation for collecting the current data is awaited.
4-24
20 Switch on the motor power, and press the [START BUTTON] in the single cycle
to start the playback operation.
>>The program whose number was specified in 16 now starts playing back. The
operating speed is the low safety speed. While the current data is being collected, the
"Collecting" appears as the execution status, and the progress made is indicated on
the progress bar.
>>The playback operation stops automatically after one cycle.
21 Upon completion of the playback operation, the tool center of gravity and weight
are obtained on the basis of the sampled current data, and the results are
22 Select [YES] using the cursor keys, and press [Enter] key.
>>As soon as the [Enter] key is pressed, the data is saved in the constant file.
>>If the "The weight of the tool is too heavy . Please lighten." message appears at the
same time as the measurement results, it means that the tool weight exceeds 100% of
the rated conveyable weight. Check the installed tool, and reduce the weight so that it
becomes less than the rated conveyable weight. (The data of the center of gravity
(COG) and weight of tool are registered irrespective of the alarm message.)
23 This now completes the measurement of the center of gravity (COG) and weight
of tool.
The results have been saved in the constant file.
Switch off the motor power.
4-25
4.5.5 Tool’s moment of inertia
The tool’s moment of inertia must be set without fail if it exceeds the allowable level of
the wrist.
Just as with the center of gravity (COG) and weight of tool, the machine may be fatally
CAUTION damaged if the setting for the moment of inertia is different from the actual value.
Before using this function, the tool weight and center of gravity position must be set in the
tool constants correctly. Inexact settings for the tool weight and center of gravity position
may drastically reduce the identification accuracy of the moment of inertia and adversely
CAUTION affect the performance and service life of the robot.
For the automatic inertia setting procedure, the operator must be qualified as an
EXPERT or above.
IMPORTANT “4.7 Concerning the qualifications of the operators”
There are 3 methods to set the moment of inertia.

Select the best method by referring to the table below.
Function Simplified setting

Item Automatic setting function Manual calculation
(registration of tool shape)
Estimated • High error with complex • Not dependent upon the • Not dependent upon the
accuracy shapes. tool shape. shape or size.
• Not affected by size. • The accuracy is • The accuracy is
• Variations in the values diminished with a low high but since it is
calculated due to variations moment of inertia which is dependent upon the
in the external dimensions less than 40% of the number of divisions,
arising with different specification. variations arise with
operators. different operators.
Required
30 to 60 sec. 2 to 3 minutes 2 to 3 hours
Time
What to External dimensions based Tool Drawing
have ready on tool or drawings Measurement program
4-26
Simplified setting procedures for the tool moment of inertia (registration of shape)
1 On the tool constant setting screen for the desired tool number, press the <Easy
Setting> key.
>>The tool moment of inertia simple setting screen such as the one shown below now
appears.
2 If any other screen has appeared, press the <Inertia Set> key.
3 As per the guide picture, select the tool designation direction and tool shape, and
input the width, depth, height and sheet thickness.
>>Select from among the four patterns the shape that is thought to most closely
represent the shape of the installed tool.
End support End support Face support Face support

Box type Frame type Box type Frame type

>>A message whether the tool center of gravity and weight setting has been completed
or not is displayed. If it has not completed yet, select "No" and exit this setting screen,
and first carry out the center of gravity and weight setting.
5 The results of the moment of inertia calculation are now displayed.
If this is satisfactory, select [Yes] on the pop-up window, and press the [Enter]
key. When the dimensions have been input incorrectly, select [No]. They can now
be input again from the start.
constant file.
6 Upon completion of the settings, press the <Complete> key. The settings are now
saved in the constant file.
7 At this time, “Mode” setting in the “Interference setting” screen will be changed
to “Normal sensitive” automatically.
(See “4.9.4“Interference setting” screen”)
4-27
Automatic setting of tool moment of inertia
This function is useful when tool shape is complex or moment of inertia is big.
At first prepare three programs, and playback them one by one. Then controller calculates the tool moment
of inertia (X, Y and Z).
INFO. Before starting measurement of the tool moment of inertia, press the "Mechanism" key
on the teach pendant, and select the target mechanism for the system with multiple
manipulators.
(1) Prepare three measurement programs
At first, create the measurement program. One measurement program can get the result of only
one component of tool moment of inertia (X or Y or Z). So in order to get the all components of
tool moment of inertia, three measurement programs are necessary.
教示再生
TEACH PLAYBACK 1 Select the teach mode.
>>Automatic measurement programs can be prepared only in the teach mode or
1-step playback mode.
2 Press [RESET/R], [2], [9] and [Enter].

Dialog box to input the tool number is now opened. Input the tool number to be
selected and press [Enter] key.
>>The tool number selected here is recorded in the measurement program.
3 Set the operator qualification to EXPERT or above.
4 Press <Service Utilities> - [30 Automatic moment of inertia] – [2 Program

creation].
>>The "Program creation" menu appears.
5 Move the cursor to the "Program," input the number of the program which is to
be used as the automatic measurement program, and press the [Enter] key.
>>The comment function is automatically recorded at the head of the automatic
measurement program, and this can be changed as required.
In order to identify whether the tool rotates around the X, Y or Z axis, the differentiation
between the X, Y and Z axes is automatically recognized from the poses at two
recorded points, and the letter "X," "Y" or "Z" is automatically added onto the end of the
comment which is recorded in the automatic measurement program.
運転準備
MOTOR ON 6 Two poses are necessary for the automatic measurement program.
Turn on the motor power and move the robot manually to the target poses while
taking care that the robot and tool will not interfere with the nearby equipment.
4-28
In order to obtain a satisfactorily accurate tool moment of inertia, bear in mind

the following points when deciding on the pose.
• Move the robot in such a way that one axis among J4, J5 and J6
axes will turn around the X, Y or Z axis of the tool coordinate
system. If possible, use only J5 or J6 axis.
• Ensure that a wide operating range is provided. (An angle of 60
degrees or more is recommended.)
• Minimize the effects of gravity.
Use a torque monitor to check the effects of gravity.

If the deflection of the torque monitor pointer is significant while the robot
is in the hold status, this indicates that gravity is exerting an effect so
move the robot to a pose where this effect is reduced.
POINT
By the phrase "while the robot is in the hold status" is meant the state in
which the motor power is ON but the robot is at a standstill. Take care
when the robot is operated since the torque monitor pointer will deflect
significantly due to the operation.
7 Move the robot to Pose 1. Align the cursor to “pose1” and press [Enter] key.
8 Move the robot to Pose 2. Align the cursor to “pose2” and press [Enter] key.
Rotate wrist axes in order that pose 1 and pose 2 differs more than 60 degrees in wrist
axes.
9 Finally, press f12 <Execute> key.

>>Based on the recorded poses, measuring program is generated. When the program
is generated properly, the following confirmation dialog box appears.
(Reference)
“X” or “Y” or “Z” is automatically added as the last character of comment. (This X/Y/Z
direction is automatically determined from the recorded two postures.)
10 Press [RESET/R] key to return to the service utilities menu.
In same way, create three measuring programs.
4-29
See following figures as sample.
Program for X component Program for Y component
+X +Y
+X
+Z +Z
+Y
The wrist axis shall The wrist axis shall

rotate with minimal rotate with minimal
effect of the gravity effect of the gravity
around the X around the Y
component on the tool component on the tool
coordinate system. (In coordinate system. (In
this case, the this case, the
rotational center of the rotational center of the
J5 axis shall be J5 axis shall be
vertical to the ground) vertical to the ground)
＜Angle of each axis (J1,J2,J3,J4,J5,J6)＞＜Angle of each axis (J1,J2,J3,J4,J5,J6)＞

POSE1 : ( 0, 90, 0, -90, 0, 90) POSE1 : ( 0, 90, 0, -90, 0, 0)
POSE2 : ( 0, 90, 0, -90, -90, 90) POSE2 : ( 0, 90, 0, -90, -90, 0)
Program for Z component (example 1) Program for Z component (example 2)
+Z
+Y
+X
The wrist axis shall rotate

with minimal effect of the
gravity around the Z
component on the tool
The wrist axis shall coordinate system. (In this
rotate with minimal case, the rotational center of
+X effect of the gravity the J6 axis shall be vertical
around the Z
to the ground.)
component on the tool
+Y coordinate system. (In
+Z this case, the
rotational center of the
J6 axis shall be
vertical to the ground.)
＜Angle of each axis (J1,J2,J3,J4,J5,J6)＞＜Angle of each axis (J1,J2,J3,J4,J5,J6)＞

POSE1 : ( 0, 90, 0, 0, -90, -90) POSE1 : ( 0,135, 45, 0, 0, 90)
POSE2 : ( 0, 90, 0, 0, -90, 0) POSE2 : ( 0,135, 45, 0, 0, 0)
(Reference)
Taught program can be utilized to create the measuring program.
Press f8 <Refer>. Then input the taught program number and press [Enter] key. First move step is used as pose
1 and second move step is used as pose 2.
4-30
(2) Measuring the tool moment of inertia

教示再生
TEACH PLAYBACK 11 After preparing three measuring programs,
Set the [MODE SELECT SWITCH] on the operation panel to "Playback."
>>The "Moment of inertia measurement" menu can be opened only in one cycle
playback mode.
Specify the tool number of the tool whose moment of inertia is to be measured
by proceeding as in step 2.
Operator qualification must be EXPERT or above.
For the system with multiple manipulators, press the "Mechanism" key on the
teach pendant, and select the mechanism that you measure the tool moment of
inertia.
12 Press <Service Utilities> - [30 Automatic moment of inertia] – [1 Tool moment of

inertia measurement].
>>The "Tool moment of inertia measurement" menu appears.
13 Move the cursor to "Program," input the number of the automatic measurement
program which has been prepared, and press the [Enter] key.
14 Press the f12 <Execute> key.

>>The execution status changes to "Waiting to gather data."
運転準備
MOTOR ON 15 Press [MOTOR ON BUTTON].
起動
START 16 Press [START BUTTON].
>>Now automatic measurement of tool moment of inertia starts.
Take sufficient care to ensure that the robot and tool do not interfere
POINT with the nearby equipment. If the robot overshoots during playback,
reduce the speed override.
>>After automatic measurement of tool moment of inertia is completed, a confirmation

dialog box appears.
17 A dialog box on which to check the calculation results now appears.
Select "Yes" to register the calculation results in the constants or "No" to
cancel.
18 Press [RESET/R] key to return to the service utilities menu.
Repeat the playback operation for the respective axis x, y and z by following the same
procedures.
19 Finally, play back the movements where the tool rotates at high speed and
check that there is no overshooting, etc.
20 To use the High-speed interference detection function, change the setting of
“Mode” to “Normal sensitive” in the screen of “Interference detection” screen.
(See “4.9.4“Interference setting” screen”)
4-31
(3) Trouble which may occur while the tool moment of inertia is being measured and troubleshooting
procedures
Phenomena Troubleshoot
The robot overshoots If the automatic measurement program is played back while a tool having
during playback. an excessively high moment of inertia is installed on the robot, the robot
may overshoot (move beyond the recorded point and then return) or
trouble may simultaneously occur.
[Countermeasure]
Reduce the override for the playback. If the measurement is undertaken
with the override reduced, however, the accuracy with which the moment
of inertia is calculated will deteriorate.
The moment of inertia [Countermeasure]

cannot be measured
with the work gripped (1) Obtain the moment of inertia of the work by calculating it manually or
by the tool. registering the tool shape.
(2) Obtain the moment of inertia minus the value for the work using the
automatic setting of the tool moment of inertia. Now set a different
tool number from the tool number in (1) as the tool whose moment of
inertia is to be measured.
(3) Select <Constant Setting> [3 Machine Constants] and [Tool
Settings], and input the numerical values for the tool with work and
without the work to register the moment of inertia.
A2699 This trouble occurs when there is something wrong with the speed and
Something is wrong current data which were gathered in order to calculate the tool moment of
with the results inertia.
obtained by [Countermeasure]
measuring • Revise the teaching so that the movement amount will be greater.
for the automatic setting of • Revise the teaching for the automatic measurement program so that
the tool moment of inertia. effect of gravity will be minimized.
• Revise the teaching so that only one axis, either the J5 axis or J6 axis,
will move.
The pose used for the This message appears when the two designated poses fall into any of the
automatic setting of the tool following categories:
moment of inertia is not • When the axis targeted for the measurement moves through less than 30
appropriate. degrees
• When two or more axes move through 5 degrees or more
• When an axis other than the J4, J5 or J6 axis moves through 5 degrees
or more
[Countermeasure]
• Revise the teaching so that the movement amount will be greater.
• Revise the teaching so that only one axis—J4, J5 or J6—will move.
This program is not This message appears when an attempt has been made to measure the
used for the automatic tool moment of inertia by selecting a program which was prepared on a
setting of the tool moment of menu screen other than the "Program creation" menu for the automatic
inertia. setting of the tool moment of inertia.
[Countermeasure]
Select a program which was prepared using the "Program preparation"
menu item for the automatic settings of the tool moment of inertia.
The same filename This message appears when a program with the number which was
exists. designated in the "Program creation" menu item already exists.
[Countermeasure]
Designate the number of the program which is not yet used.
This step does not This message appears when the program referenced on the "Program
exist. creation" menu item does not have at least two movement steps.
[Countermeasure]
• Reference a program with at least two movement steps.
• Move the robot manually, and designate a pose.
4-32
Switch the designated This message appears when an attempt has been made to open the
mechanism to a manipulator. "Program creation" menu and "Tool moment of inertia" menu in a situation
where a multiple number of 6-axis multi-joint robots exist in one unit and
the current mechanism is not a 6-axis multi-joint robot.
[Countermeasure]
First return to the mode screen, press the "Mechanism" key on the teach
pendant, and switch the current mechanism to manipulator (6-axis
multi-joint robot).
The wrong axis or This message appears in the following cases:

mechanism has been • When the axis selected by the "Tool moment of inertia" menu to move in
specified. the program is not J4, J5 or J6
• When an attempt has been made to measure the moment of inertia on
the
"Tool moment of inertia" menu in a situation where a multiple number of 6-
axis multi-joint robots exist in one unit and the current mechanism is not a
6- axis multi-joint robot
[Countermeasure]
• Revise the teaching so that only one axis—J4, J5 or J6—will move.
• First return to the mode screen, press the "Mechanism" key on the teach
pendant, and switch the current mechanism to manipulator (6-axis
multi-joint robot).
The tool moment of This message appears when the results of automatically measuring the
inertia rating has been tool moment of inertia and the value input for the tool moment of inertia on
exceeded. the Tool Settings" menu selected from <Constant Setting> - [3 Machine
Constants] have exceeded the rating.
When a robot with a tool having an excessively high moment of inertia is
used, its performance and service life may be adversely affected.
Furthermore, during playback the robot may overshoot (move beyond the
recorded point and then return) or trouble may simultaneously occur.
[Countermeasure]
• Review the tool.
• If there is no alternative to using the current tool, take remedial action by
reducing the override or revising the teaching, for instance, and take
sufficient care to ensure that the robot will not overshoot or no other trouble
will occur.
4.5.6 Max, radius of tool

Set the maximum radius of tool
rotation if the tool length
(length up to the interpolation
point) and the tool shape are
significantly different as they
are in the figure below. Use the
radius of a sphere which
encompasses all the space
from the interpolation point as
the center, up to the outermost Tool tip
circumference of the tool
Gripper
(including the work piece which
is gripped in the case of a ●
material handling tool) as the
setting.
This radius has absolutely no

effect on the operations and
paths during manual
operations and playback. It is
Max. radius of tool
used to check interference
territory and other purposes.
Fig. 4.5.2 Max. radius of tool
4-33
4.5.7 Tool length and angles of Daihen’s arc welding torch

Tool constant of an arc welding torch differs according to a torch type or a robot type which is installed. When
a representative arc welding torch made by Daihen is used, the tool constant values are shown as following.
Tool constant of an arc welding torch which is not mentioned in this instruction manual is described in the
instruction manual for each arc welding torch. For further details, refer to the instruction manual for that.
CO2/MAG Torch
Table 4.5.2 Daihen arc welding torch tool constant(New torch)
For N series Referential
Length Angle Center of gravity Weight Moment of inertia Radius
V type drawing
X Y Z Rx Ry Rz Gx Gy Gz Mass Ix Iy Iz r
[mm] [mm] [mm] [deg] [deg] [deg] [mm] [mm] [mm] [kg] kgm^2 kgm^2 kgm^2 mm
RT3500S 118.0
127.0 2.1
0.050
0.030
RT5000S 128.0 2.2
RTW5000S 119.0 129.0 2.3 0.040
140.0 0.0 385.0 180.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.060 0.090 0.0 Fig. 4.5.3
RZ3500S 126.0 2.2
118.0
RZ3510S 128.0 2.1 0.050 0.030
RZW5000S 119.0 129.0 2.3 0.060 0.040
RT3500H 140.0
2.3 0.070 0.100
RT5000H 107.0
142.0
RTW5000H 2.4 0.080
0.0 0.0 400.0 180.0 -45.0 0.0 0.0 0.110 0.030 0.0 Fig. 4.5.4
RZ3500H 111.0 141.0
2.3 0.070
RZ3510H 107.0 140.0 0.100
RZW5000H 111.0 142.0 2.4 0.080 0.110
RT3500L 119.0
148.0
2.4 0.120 0.040
RT5000L 149.0
RTW5000L 121.0 146.0 2.6
0.0 0.0 400.0 180.0 -45.0 0.0 0.0 0.080 0.130 0.050 0.0 Fig. 4.5.5
RZ3500L 126.0 142.0 2.5
RZ3510L 119.0 148.0 2.4 0.120 0.040
RZW5000L 121.0 146.0 2.6 0.130 0.050
Fig. 4.5.3 Fig. 4.5.4 Fig. 4.5.5
4-34
Table 4.5.3 Daihen arc welding torch tool constant(New torch)

B type drawing
[mm] [mm] [mm] [deg] [deg] [deg] [mm] [mm] [mm] [kg] kgm^2 kgm^2 Kgm^2 mm
RT3500H -10.0 74.0 1.9
310.0 0.030 0.030 Fig. 4.5.6
RT5000H -135.5 -11.0 76.0 2.0
RTW5000H 320.0 85.0 2.1 0.040 Fig. 4.5.7
0.0 180.0 -45.0 0.0 -12.0 0.0 0.040 0.000 0.0
RZ3500H -140.5 315.0 79.0 2.0 Fig. 4.5.8
0.030
RZ3510H 310.0 -10.0 74.0 1.9 0.030 Fig. 4.5.6
-135.5
RZW5000H 320.0 -12.0 85.0 2.1 0.040 0.040 Fig. 4.5.7
RT3500L -5.0 69.0
310.0 1.9 0.030 0.030 Fig. 4.5.9
RT5000L -90.5
70.0
-6.0 Fig.
RTW5000L 82.0 0.040 0.040
330.0 2.0 4.5.10
0.0 180.0 -31.0 0.0 0.0 0.000 0.0
RZ3500L -95.5 -7.0 78.0 Fig. 4.5.11
0.030 0.030
RZ3510L 310.0 -5.0 69.0 1.9 Fig. 4.5.9
-90.5 Fig.
RZW5000L 330.0 -6.0 82.0 2.0 0.040 0.040
4.5.10
Fig. 4.5.6 Fig. 4.5.7 Fig. 4.5.8 Fig. 4.5.9 Fig. 4.5.10 Fig. 4.5.11
4-35
CO2/MIG/MAG Torch(Past Torch)

Table 4.5.4 Daihen arc welding torch tool constant (Past Torch)
V type drawing
MTXC-3531 2.0
MTXCB-3531 2.1
MTXCB-5031 2.3
MTXC-5031 0.0 0.0 400.0 180.0 -45.0 0.0 109.0 0.0 123.0 2.1 Fig. 4.5.12
MTXCW-5031 2.2
MTXCA-2531 2.1
MTXCAW-5031 2.2
MTX-3531 1.9
MTXB-3531 2.0
MTX-5031 2.0
MTXB-5031 140.0 0.0 385.0 180.0 0.0 0.0 116.0 0.0 107.0 2.2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Fig. 4.5.13
MTXW-5031 2.1
MTXA-2531 2.0
MTXAW-5031 2.1
MTX-3531 1.9
MTXB-3531 2.0
MTX-5031 2.0
MTXB-5031 0.0 0.0 350.0 180.0 -45.0 0.0 143.0 0.0 195.0 2.2 Fig. 4.5.14
MTXW-5031 2.2
MTXA-2531 1.9
MTXAW-5031 2.2
Fig. 4.5.12 Fig. 4.5.13 Fig. 4.5.14
4-36
TIG Torch
Table 4.5.5 Daihen arc welding torch tool constant (TIG Torch)
V type drawing
MWXC-2001 90.0 0.0 151.0 2.2
0.0 0.0 360.0 180.0 -45.0 0.0 Fig. 4.5.15
MWXC-3501 90.0 0.0 148.0 2.1
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
MWX-2001 114.0 0.0 148.0 2.2
170.0 0.0 385.0 180.0 0.0 0.0 Fig. 4.5.16
MWX-3501 111.0 0.0 146.0 2.1
Fig. 4.5.15 Fig. 4.5.16
Pull type servo torch (4 roll specifications) CO2/MIG/MAG

Table 4.5.6 Tool constants of DAIHEN pull type servo torch (4 roll specifications)
For N series Referentia
V type l drawing
MTXC-3534P 5.4
MTXCB-3534P 0.0 0.0 445.0 5.5 Fig. 4.5.17
MTXC-5034P 180.0 -45.0 0.0 107.0 0.0 212.0 5.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
MTXCW-5034P 5.6 Fig. 4.5.18
MTXCA-2534P 0.0 0.0 465.0 5.6 Fig. 4.5.19
MTXCAW-5034P 5.7 Fig. 4.5.20
Fig. 4.5.17 Fig. 4.5.18 Fig. 4.5.19 Fig. 4.5.20
4-37
Pull type servo torch (2 roll specifications) Aluminum MIG

Table 4.5.7 Tool constants of DAIHEN pull type servo torch (2 roll specifications)
l drawing
V type
MTXC-3541PS
0.0 0.0 375.0 3.3 Fig.4.5.21
MTXCA-3041PS
180.0 -45.0 0.0 110.0 0.0 80.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
MTXCW-5041PS 3.4
0.0 0.0 385.0 Fig.4.5.22
MTXCAW-4041PS 3.3
l drawing
B type
MTXC-3541PS
-137.0 0.0 440 3.2 Fig.4.5.23
MTXCA-3041PS
180.0 -45.0 0.0 -11.0 0.0 150.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
MTXCW-5041PS -127.0 0.0 460.0 3.3 Fig.4.5.24
MTXCAW-4041PS -123.0 0.0 455.0 3.2 Fig.4.5.25
Fig.4.5.21 Fig.4.5.22 Fig.4.5.23 Fig.4.5.24 Fig.4.5.25
4-38
4.5.8 Tool conversion

In the case the tool shape deforms, an already taught task program will lose compatibility. It is necessary to
convert the already taught task program so that the tool tip position and the target angle should be same as
those before deformation.
When the settings of the tool length and the tool angle are changed, in order to keep the compatibility of
already taught task program, the following tool conversion function is prepared. Convert the program
according to the following procedures.
1 After the settings of the tool length and the tool angle, press <Complete> key.
The set contents are stored into the constant file.
0
2 When some of tool constants are changed, the following popup window is
displayed.
>> The change of tool constants can be checked by either of the following changes.
・When one of tool lengths x, y, and z has changed 0.05mm or more
・When one of tool angle length x, y, and z has changed 0.005deg or more
3 When to convert the program, select [OK] and press [Enter] key.
>> The following tool conversion screen is displayed.
When the 2-point tool length is set, the conducted mechanism and the tool number,
and the program number and the step number showing referential points before and
after conversion are succeeded to.
4-39
4 Press <Execute> key.
5 The corrected value is calculated, and after a while, the result is displayed as
shown below.
>> At this time, only the corrected value is displayed, and the program conversion is
not carried out yet.
If program conversion can be started, select [OK] and press [Enter] key.
6 The objective programs are converted, and the result of the converted program
is displayed as shown below.
7 After conversion of all the objective programs is completed, press [Enter] key.
8 After the conversion, carry out entire confirmation.

Exit the constant menu, and run the program converted in the above 6 by check
go/back in the teach mode.
The conversion is successful if the tool tip position and the target angle are same as
those before deformation.
4-40
4.6 Signal attribute settings

This section describes the method used to set the signal attributes of this controller. The signal attributes can be
classified differently as in the tables below.
Table 4.6.1 Types of signal attributes

Signal
Explanation
attributes
Signals which are input from external sources to the controller.
Input signal
Classification by They are also called "I" signals.
direction Output Signals which the controller outputs to external sources.
signal They are also called "O" signals.
Signal
Explanation
attributes
Signals with a predetermined significance such as the "start
command" input signal for starting the robot and the "robot
running" output signal which turns on during robot playback
Status
operations are called status signals. Many and varied signals are
signal
Classification by provided by the applications but those signals which are used as
application the standard signals and which are not dependent on applications
are called standard signal attributes.
General- These are signals which, for instance, can write ON/OFF
purpose commands freely in programs. Applications can be created freely
signals by putting together the external sequences in the manner desired.
Signal
Explanation
attributes
If a software PLC is not
This is a blanket term for signals
Logical going to be used, the logical
which enable access from the
signals signals are directly
software side.
Classification by connected with physical
construction This is a blanket term for signal signals in their original form.
Physical attributes which have been In this case, therefore, this
signals connected with a DC 24V field bus classification may be
or other external source. ignored.
A total of 2,048 input signals and 2,048 output signals have been provided (total number of logical signals). On
the other hand, the physical signals are restricted by the I/O form provided. For example, up to 32 inputs and 32
outputs are available when only one I/O board (option) is installed. All of 2,048 inputs and 2,048 outputs are
available when DeviceNet (option) is installed
So the numbers of logical signals used as status signals can be set freely in order to fit the physical I/O capacity
which is actually used. This is known as “signal attribute assignment”. At the factory, the standard assignment is
set although this can easily be changed. Set the alternative assignment in accordance with the system design.
this controller
Output signal
Status
Logical signals
Physical signals
signal
Input signal Output signal
Software
PLC Outside
Input signal
General- Output signal
purpose
signals
Input signal
If a software PLC is not going to be used, the logical signals and physical signals are directly connected.
Fig. 4.6.1 Signal attributes
4-41
4.6.1 Standard signal attributes assignment

2 Select <Constant Setting> - [6 Signal attributes] - [2 Input signal assignment] - [1

Standard Inputs].
>>The basic input signal assignment setting screen such as the one shown below now
appears.
(For details on the spot welding signals and other special-purpose signals, refer to the
operating instructions of the application concerned.)
3 To switch the screen, press the page up or down key.
4 Align the cursor with the desired position, input the signal number (such as 1),
and then press the [Enter] key.
>>"Ext. play start [30]" signifies that signal no. 30 among the 2,048 logical input signals
is treated as the start instruction. "Reduce speed [0]" signifies that this status signal is
not used.
5 When <Refer> key is pressed, the following table appears listing the numbers of
the signals that serve as keys. This is useful for checking what has been set.
A signal indicated in gray is a status signal; a signal indicated with black characters (or
no characters) on a white background is a general-purpose signal.
After browsing, use the [RESET/R] key to exit.
Furthermore, it is possible to give names to the general-purpose signals on this
screen. When the cursor is aligned, and the [ENABLE] + [EDIT] keys are pressed, the
soft keyboard screen appears. Input the desired names on this screen.
6 Upon completion of the settings, press <Complete> key. The settings are
>>It is not possible to assign a logical input signal to more than one status. When the
<Complete> key is pressed, the assignment of all the logical input signals is checked,
and if a signal has been assigned to more than one status, an error message is
displayed. (This duplication check is conducted not only for the basic input signals but
for all the input signals.)
>>After the signal assignment has been saved, operation returns to the input signal
assignment menu.
7 If the contents are not going to be rewritten, do not press <Complete> key but
[RESET/R] key instead to exit the setting screen.
8 Similarly, basic output signals can be assigned in [6 Signal attributes] − [2

Output signal assignment] − [1 Standard Outputs].
Operation is the same as for the basic input signals.
4-42
When the input signal or output signal assignment has been changed, turn off the power
of the controller and then turn it back on.
This step must be taken without fail in order to initialize the status signals.
CAUTION If operation is continued without turning off the power, the status signals may not be input
or output properly.
4.6.2 Standard input signals

This section describes the basic input signals among the status signals which are used under the standard
specifications.
"U1" after the names of signals in the table denotes that the signals are used for unit 1. Ignore this designation
except when the multi-unit specifications have been provided. Under the multiunit specifications, the signals
are assigned on a unit by unit basis.
Table 4.6.2 Standard input signals

Standard input signal Factory-set
Functions
designation Input signal
Ext. play start. U1 I30 This is the signal to start a program from external
devices such as PLC and so forth.
In the case to use this, set <Service utilities> - [1
Teach/Playback Condition] – “2 Motors ON/START
sel .source" to "External".
Int. unit play stop U1 0 This signal individually stops units (programs) that have
been started with an internal start.
Remember that this signal, provided that it is allocated,
is always valid regardless of the start select (internal,
external or station start) signal setting.
Ext. All unit play stop 0 This signal stops the robot from an external source.
All the units stop together. Set to "0" if a multi-unit is not
being used.
Ext. unit play stop U1 I31 This signal stops the robot from an external source. It
takes effect at all times regardless of the motor
or ON/START select setting. This is normal close
contact (robot stops when OFF). So input signal
0 must be always ON if not used.
(By registering “0” here, this is disabled.)
MotorsOFF external I32 This signal turns off the motor power from an external
source. It takes effect at all times regardless of the motor
ON/START select setting.
Program sel. bits U1 1 I17 These signals are for selecting programs in response to
Program sel. bits U1 2 I18 instructions not from the teach pendant but from an
Program sel. bits U1 3 I19 external controller.
Program sel. bits U1 4 I20 When these signals are to be used, it is necessary to
Program sel. bits U1 5 I21 select <Service utilities> – [1 Teach/Playback condition]
Program sel. bits U1 6 I22 - "3 Playback mode prog. sel." to "External."
Program sel. bits U1 7 I23 Programs 1 to 9999 are selected using the 16 signals
Program sel. bits U1 8 I24 listed on the left. The input signal that determines the
Program sel. bits U1 9 to 16 0 timing at which signals are to be read in a binary format
Program strobe U1 I25 is the program strobe signal.
External reset 0 This signal is input when executing fault reset and
clearing the step No. from an external source at the
same time. It functions in the same way as short-cut R0.
Reduce speed 0 This establishes the "safety speed" as the speed during
playback.
The safety speed refers to the movement of the tool tip
at a speed of 250 mm/sec.
Reservation cancel 0 This signal is for canceling all the programs reserved in
the queue when <Service utilities> - [1 Teach/Playback
condition] – "4 Program queue" is set to “1 queue” or “10
queues”.
4-43
Standard input signal Factory-set

Functions
designation Input signal
Ext. Machine Lock 0 This signal is input in order to switch the machine lock
status from an external source. When this signal is ON,
machine lock is enabled, and the robot will not work
even if the axis operation key is pressed or a program is
operated. However, even when machine lock is enabled,
servo power supply remains ON, which please note.
Territory Position 1 to 16 0 If the work space of different robots overlaps, an

"interference area" is defined for each of the controllers
to ensure that the robots will not simultaneously enter
the area of overlap. The robot first confirms the input of
this signal, and it then enters into the "interference area."
Fault Reset 0 This signal is input when executing fault reset from an
external source.
Conveyor running 1 0 In conveyor synchronization system, the signal which is

set to ON while the conveyors are operating is input.
2 0 Instruction manual “Conveyor synchronization”
(option)
Conv. normal 0 In conveyor synchronization system, this specifies the
Conv. simulation 0 conveyor synchronized operation mode.
Instruction manual “Conveyor synchronization”
Conv. test 0 (option)
Conv. start LS 1 0 In conveyor synchronization system e, this inputs the
trigger for starting the tracking operation.
2 0 Instruction manual “Conveyor synchronization”
(option)
Mecha. Disconnect 0 It ensures that the designated mechanism will not move
by axis operations or manual open/close operations.
Needed to be registered up Since errors are also not checked, the robot can be
to the maximum mechanism evacuated when, for instance, the servo gun fails to
number defined in controller operate.
(M1 to ***) The lock mode is established when this signal is input.
If check operation or automatic operation (playback) is performed while this function is

used, the robot may interfere with peripheral jigs or other robots.
In particular, if mechanism isolation is performed for an external axis such as a slider or
CAUTION positioner, the robot and external axis operations will not synchronize. Pay close
attention to ensure that the robot does not interfere with peripheral objects.
Example of interference: In a robot + slider system, while “mechanism disconnection” is
being performed for a slider, the slider does not move to the teach position, and the robot
operates and interferes with the work piece.
Speed O/R input 1 to 7 0 Speed override is exercised in accordance with the input
signal.
Setting can be made up to 4 ports (7 bits per port).
Instruction manual “Input-dependent speed
override function (analog inputs included)” (option)
Jump Prg. No. (BCD) U1 0 This signal selects the program when the function
command (JMPPBCD or CALLPBCD) is executed.
There are 16 points.
Jump prg. No. (BIN) U1 0 This signal selects the program when the function
command (JMPPBIN or CALLPBIN) is executed.
There are 16 points.
User chk complete 1 to 8 0 This signal notifies the robot when the maintenance has
(M1 to M9) been completed, which the mechanism or the arc welder
(W1 to W4) 0 for the maintenance target.
Reset out. signal 0 This signal inputs when an out signal except the status
signal is put the state OFF mandatory.
MotorsON external 0 This signal sets the motor power on from an external
source. To utilize this signal, <Service utilities> – [1
Teach/Playback condition] – “2 MotorsON/START sel.
source” must be set to "External".
4-44
4.6.3 Standard output signals

This section describes the basic output signals among the status signals which are used under the standard
specifications.
"U1" after the names of signals in the table denotes that the signals are used for unit 1.
Ignore this designation except when the multi-unit specifications have been provided.
Table 4.6.3 Standard output signals

Standard output signal Factory-set
Functions
designation Output signal
Under stopping U1 0 This level signal is output at all times except during the
robot running and CHECK GO/BACK.
This signal is for outputting the stop status of each unit.
The "stopped" signal is used as the signal which
indicates the status in which all the units are stopped.
This signal remains unchanged even when the mode is
changed. (When it is ON in the playback mode, it will not
be set to OFF even when the playback mode is changed
to the teach mode.) The "temporarily stopped" signal is
used when the stop status is to be output to an external
device in the playback mode only. The "temporarily
stopped" signal is output only while automatic operation
is stopped. (It is not output in the teach mode.)
Program ended U1 O20 This level signal is output at the end of a program during
playback.
By selecting <Constants Setting> – [6 Signals] – [1
Signal condition] and "3 End relay time," the minimum
output time can be set, and it is reset at startup.
Emergency stopped O24 This level signal is output while the emergency stop
button or external emergency stop button is held down.
In playbk mode O33 This level signal is output while the playback mode is
selected.
In teach mode O25 This level signal is output when the teach mode has
been selected.
Hi-spd teach mode 0 This level signal is output while the high-speed teach
mode is selected. (The high-speed teach mode is an
option).
Step-set alarm 0 This signal is output when a step which is two or more
steps ahead of the current step has been specified in the
teach or playback mode. It is a 200ms pulse signal.
It is not output when step 0 has been selected.
Interlock alarm 0 This level signal is output when the interlock wait status
has exceeded the specified time, and it is reset when
interlock wait is released.
The specified time is set using <Constants Setting> – [6
Signal attributes] – [1 Signal conditions] and "7 Interlock
alarm timer."
Waiting unit num. 0 While waiting for interlock, these output the numbers of
1 to 4 the units standing by in synchronization with the
"Interlock alarm " output signal.
Wait I signal num. 0 During interlock wait and in synchronization with the
1 to 16 "Interlock alarm" output signal, the numbers of the
waiting I signals are output.
Over run 0 These are turned ON during the operation of the limit
switches used to detect overrun and mounted on the
robot arm.
4-45

Functions
Program selected U1 0 The specified program ACK signal can be output when a
1 to 16 program has been selected by setting "External" for
program selection. This is a 200ms pulse signal. (Refer
to the “Prg. sel. bits” among the basic input signals.)
Ext.reset ackno. 0 This signal is output when the input of the "external reset
signal" has been acknowledged while the playback
mode is in single cycle or continuous and holding. It is a
200ms pulse signal.
Robot moving U1 0 During playback operation, this signal is output while the
robot is moving regardless of whether it is being
operated manually. (servo on and axis works actually)
Robot running U1 O26 This signal is output during the robot running or at the
time of check go/back. It is a level signal which coincides
with the lighting of the start lamp.
(In the case of a multi-station start system, the start lamp
remains lighted and the start underway signal remains
ON even during temporary stop.)
Ext.prg..sel.enabled U1 O27 This level signal is output when <Service utilities> – [1

Teach/Playback conditions] – “3 Playback mode
program select” has been set to "External."
External program selection can be set per unit, and
there is signal per unit.
Ext. start enabled U1 O28 This level signal is output when <Service utilities> – [1
Teach/Playback conditions] – “2 Motors ON/START sel.
source” has been set to "External".
Common to all the units.
Speed reduced 0 This level signal is output while the robot is running at
the safety speed.
Motors energized O29 This level signal is output while the servo power (motor
power) is on.
Unit ready U1 O19 This level signal is output in a status in which the auto
operation (starting in playback mode) is acknowledged.
Starting cannot be initiated if the conditions have not
been satisfied. The signal can be set using a
combination of several conditions.
State output 1 O30 It is possible to create this output signal using a

combination of various statuses such as the playback
mode and program selection status. The statuses to be
2-16 0 combined can be defined in 16 different ways, and the
first of these signals is assigned as the status output
signal.
Home position U1 1 O31 This level signal is output when the robot is at the
prescribed home position. Up to 32 positions per unit
2 to 32 0 can be registered by selecting <Constant Setting> – [9
Territory Definition] – [1 Home position].
Territory position 1 to 16 0 If the work space of different robots overlaps, an

"interference area" is defined for each of the controllers
to ensure that the robots will not simultaneously enter
the area of overlap.
Prog. echoback bits 1 to 16 0 These signals output the program No. reserved in the
queue.
4-46

Functions
Start Program No. 1 to 16 0 This outputs the number of the task program executed
first after startup. This signal remains unchanged even
when the number of the program executed by a program
call or jump command changes.
Select <Constant Setting> - [6 Signals] - [1 Signal
Condition] - “2 Output method of program and step
number” and select “Binary” or “BCD” as the output
format. The initial value is “Binary “.
Controller READY 0 This level signal is output after the power has been
turned on when the operating system (Windows) and the
robot software have started up in sequence and normal
control is exercised.
It is only when this signal has been output that the status
in which I/O (Input/Output) control is enabled is
established.
Executing prog.(Sys) 0 This is set to ON in either of the following circumstances

regardless of the start system.
a) During automatic operation
b) While automatic operation is stopped
c) When, after automatic operation has stopped, the
mode has been transferred to the teach mode while the
"Restart method in Play Mpde " is set to " Specified"
Executing program U1 0 This level signal is output during automatic operation in

the playback mode regardless of the start system.
It is not output in the check GO/BACK mode or in the
playback mode while operation is stopped.
Holding 0 This level signal is output at all times except during the
robot running and check go/back.
It turns ON while the robot is not in motion whether the
temporary stop, cycle end or other cases.
In the multi-unit control, it is output only after all the units
are stopped.
Stopping 0 This level signal is output when automatic operation has

been stopped at an interim point (stopped at an interim
point in the program) in the playback mode regardless of
the start system. It is not output when operation stops at
the cycle end.
The "holding" signal is output in any mode, but this
signal is output only in playback mode.
Machine disabled 0 This level signal is output when <Service utilities> – [1

Teach/Playback condition] – “6 Machine lock" has been
set to "Enabled".
Continuous cycles 0 This level signal is output when <Service utilities> – [1
Teach/Playback condition] – “1 Playback mode" has
been set to "Continue."
Single cycle 0 This level signal is output when <Service utilities> – [1
been set to "1 Cycle"
Single step 0 This level signal is output when <Service utilities> – [1
been set to "1 Step"
Check go 0 This level signal is output while check go is being
processed in teach mode.
Check backward 0 This level signal is output while check back is being
processed in teach mode.
On searching U1 0 It is set to ON while a search command is being
executed by the search function.
Instruction manual “Handling application” or “Shift
functions by external input” (option).
4-47

Functions
Write search org. 0 This signal is set to ON during search basis writing by
the search function.
Instruction manual “Handling application” or “Shift
functions by external input” (option).
Prog. No. monitor U1 0 These signals output the currently selected program No.
1 to 16
Step No. monitor U1 0 These signals output the currently selected step No.
1 to 16
Conv. count reset 0 In conveyor synchronization system, it is output to
1 0 acknowledge that the conveyor counter has been reset.
2 0 Instruction manual “Conveyor tracking” (option)
Conv. normal 0 In conveyor synchronization system, it outputs the
Conv. simulation 0 current operation mode.
Instruction manual “Conveyor tracking” (option)
Conv. test 0
Remote enabled 0 This outputs the fact that the switching of the
teach/playback mode selection using input signals is
now enabled.
Battery warning M1 0 This signal is output when the voltage of the encoder
M2 battery has dropped.
Failure 0 This level signal is output with the occurrence of an error

or alarm or information.
Error port O21 This level signal is output when an error (fault with a high
level of fatality) has occurred.
Alarm port O23 This level signal is output when an alarm (warning level
fault) has occurred.
Information port O32 This level signal is output when information has
occurred.
Fail. classific. 1 to 8 0 The causes of the detected fault are classified into
several categories, and these signals output the
corresponding classification code that applies.
Failure code 1 to 16 0 These signals output the code number of the detected
fault.
Failure selector 0 The fault output select and STRB signals are output
signals which are used to arrange the timing, according
Failure strobe 0 to the setting of <Constant Setting> – [6 Signals] – [1
Signal Condition] – “1 Failure code output”.
Fail. unit num. 1 to 8 0 These signals output the number of the unit in which
failure has been detected.
Fail. mecha num. 0 These signals output the number of the mechanism in
1 to 4 which failure has been detected.
Fail. axis number 1 to 4 0 These signals output the number of the axis in which
Fail. weld number 1 to 3 0 These signals output the number of the welder in which
Fail. sensor num. 0 These signals output the number of the sensor in which
1 to 3 failure has been detected.
Fail. assist number 1 to 16 0 These signals output the number of the auxiliary code
when failure has been detected.
Failure reset port 0 This signal is output when the kind of fault that requires
the failure reset operation has occurred.
Mech. Disconnection 0 This is set to ON while a mechanism is being

M1 disconnected.
M2 One signal is provided for each of the mechanisms.
4-48

Functions
Mech. Servo OFF 0 This signal is for outputting the servo power status of
M1 each mechanism to the external devices.
M2 0 One signal is provided for each of the mechanisms.
Instruction manual “Mechanism-by- mechanism
servo on/off function” (option)
Dryrun 0 This level signal is output when the playback limit (dry
run) of the function command has been established.
"Dry run" refers to playback operations for which no
specific function commands are executed. The robot
does move.
To set dry run, first select <Service Utilities> and
[Teach/Playback Condition] followed by [8 Playback with
func.(Dryrun)], and then select "Enabled" or "Signal." If
"Signal" is selected as the playback limit setting, the
"Dryrun Enabled" basic input signal is set to ON.
In the case of the multi-unit specifications, select the
playback limit target on the above menu to "Unit" or
"Signal." If "Signal" is selected, the "Dryrun
Unit/Sysytem" basic input signal is set to ON, and then
the signal is input to the unit targeted for the dry run by
the "Dryrun Enabled" signal provided for each unit.
Dryrun U1 0 This level signal is output if the playback limit (dry run) of
the function command is set to "Unit" and the unit
concerned has been set to dry run.
TCP speed output 0 These enable signals proportionate to the linear speed
1 to 6 of the robot's tool center point (TCP) to be output.
Instruction manual “TCP velocity data output
(including analog output)” (option)
Shock sensor act. 0 This signal is output while the shock sensor (option)
mounted on the robot is detecting a collision.
Sub Mechanism No 0 This is the signal for confirming the sub mechanism
connection.
The sub mechanism number during connection is
output.
Encoder Power OFF 0 Mechanism is electrically cut off, and then it becomes
ON.
This is the signal prepared for mechanism.
Mech. Discon. Prmit 0 This becomes ON when mechanism may be cut off.
This is the signal prepared for mechanism.
Vision connect 0 This is the signal that is output when the visual sensor is
connected.
Vision monitor off 0 This is the signal that turns off the monitor display of the
visual sensor when there is no key input.
User maintenance 1 to 8 0 This is the signal that is output when the maintenance
(M1 to M9) item which is set on the User maintenance function
(W1 to W4) 0 reaches at the time of maintenance which the
mechanism or the arc welder for the maintenance target.
4-49
4.6.4 How to copy the I/O settings between the controllers

It is possible to copy the I/O settings between the controllers. (Import / export)
This function is convenient when it is necessary to use several controllers with a same setting.
EXPORT S**SIGL.CON IMPORT
This operation should be performed after switching the operator class to EXPERT or higher.
Exporting the setting file

Let’s export the I/O setting to the USB memory (RC Ex.Mem1).
(Please insert an USB memory to this robot controller in advance.)
1 Open <Constant settings> - [6 Signals] – [1 Signal Condition] menu.
2 Press [Enable] + [Export].

＋ >>The following screen is displayed.
Window selection
Item selection
Enter
3 After selecting the destination folder for the export (In this case, “RC Ex.Mem1”),
press <Execute>.
>>The following message is displayed.
4 Input the 2 digits (1-99) and press [Enter].

>>A file with the following name will be created in the destination folder.
S**SIGL.CON (“**” is the inputted number)
4-50
Importing the setting file

Let’s import the I/O setting file that was exported to the USB memory in the previous section to the other
controller.
(Please insert the USB memory to the robot controller in advance.)
1 Open <Constant settings> - [6 Signals] – [1 Signal Condition] menu.
2 Press <Import>.
>>The following screen is displayed.
Window selection
Item selection
Enter
3 Select the “S**SIGL.CON” in the USB memory (RC Ex. Mem1) using the [Cursor
key] and the [Enter] key and then press <Execute>.
4 Set “Enabled” for the field that you want to import.
＋ Signal condition [SIG_COND]

I/O Signal Assignment [IN_ASSIGN],[OUT_ASSIGN]
I/O Signal Name [SIG_NAME]
Combination I/O Signal [SIG_ASSIGN]
Signal Attribute [SIG_ATTR]
For details of the respective fields, see the next section.

5 After making the setting, press <Execute> to import.
>>Only the selected fields will be imported from the “S**SIGL.CON”.
4-51
6 After the import process, the following window will be displayed.
7 Select “YES” and press [Enter].

>>The robot controller will restart.
4-52
“S**SIGL.CON” is a plain text file.

Some fields can be imported but the other fields cannot be imported.
The fields that can be imported
[SIG_COND]
Description Condition settings for various I/O signals
Setting menu <Constant setting> - [6 Signals] - [1 Signal condition]
[IN_ASSIGN]
Description The assignment setting for the input signals.
<Constant setting> - [6 Signals] – [2 Input Signal Assignment]
[1 Standard Inputs]
Setting menu
[2 Spot Inputs]
[3 Arc Inputs] etc.
[OUT_ASSIGN]
Description The assignment setting for the output signals.
<Constant setting> - [6 Signals] – [2 Output Signal Assignment]
[1 Standard Outputs]
Setting menu
[2 Spot Outputs]
[3 Arc Outputs] etc.
[SIG_NAME]
The names for the input signals and the output signals.
Description
Only “SHIFT-JIS” or “ASCII CODE” are available.
<Constant setting> - [6 Signals] – [7 Signal Attribute]
Setting menu [1 Input Signal]
[2 Output Signal]
IN1-16=ABC,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
The names for the input signals (I1 to I16). (I1 is “ABC”)
Example
OUT1-16=DEF,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
The names for the output signals (O1 to O16). (O1 is “DEF”)
[SIG_ASSIGN]
Description The settings for the combination I/O signals.
<Constant Setting> - [6 Signals]
[2 Input Signal Assignment]
[7 Combination Inputs]
Setting menu And
<Constant Setting> - [6 Signals]
[3 Output Signal Assignment]
[7 Combination Outputs]
[SIG_ATTR]
Description The settings for the attribute of the I/O signals.
<Constant Setting> - [6 Signals] – [7 Signal Attribute]
[1 Input Signal]
[2 Output Signal]
Setting menu
[3 Output Signal Attributes]
[4 Pulse Table Setting]
[5 Delay Table Setting]
4-53
The fields that cannot be imported
[SIG_HEADER]
Description File header.
[UNITREADY_COND]
Description The condition settings for the “Unit Ready Output Signal”.
Setting menu <Constant Setting> - [6 Signals] - [4 Unit Ready Signal]
[OUTPUT_COND]
Description Status output signal can be customized. Up to 16 settings can be registered.
Setting menu <Constant Setting> - [6 Signals] - [5 State output customization]
[SIG_PORT]
The connection relationship between the Logical signals and the Physical signals are set
Description in this field. For details, refer to “4.8 I/O area mapping function”.
Setting menu <Constant Setting> - [6 Signals] - [15 Hardware setting]
[SIG_MONI]
Description Display items for the signal monitor window can be set.
Setting menu <Constant Setting> - [6 Signals] - [17 Monitor setting]
[SIG_JW32]
Description Not used.
4-54
4.7 Concerning the qualifications of the operators
4.7.1 Operation qualifications

The qualifications of individual operators can be set in this controller.
Once the qualifications of the individual operator are set, special functions or menus can be hidden from
view or displayed depending on the expertise level of the operator who is operating the robot.
When, for instance, BEGINNER (elementary level operators) has been set as the operator qualifications, it
is possible to place restrictions on the important menus and functions related to robot control so that the
operator will not be able to operate them by mistake or out of carelessness.
Table 4.7.1 Classes of operator qualifications

Operator
Operators targeted Content
qualifications
This class is set for those operators who are beginning
Elementary level
BEGINNER to learn about operating the robot and who only perform
operators
the startup of the robot in the factory.
This class is set for those operators who are somewhat
USER Regular operators
familiar with the operation of the robot.
This class is set for those operators who are in charge of
EXPERT Expert operators
maintaining the robot.
This class is set for a handful of the operators who are in
SPECIALIST Senior expert operators
charge of maintaining the robot.
Table 4.7.2 Main functions whose access is restricted

Operator qualifications
BEGINNER USER EXPERT SPECIALIST
Main functions
Whose access is restricted
General operations ○ ○ ○ ○
Constants Setting × － ○ ○
Functions and maintenance work

× × ○ ○
requiring special expertise
Optional function settings × × × ○
○:Can be accessed; ×:cannot be accessed; –:not displayed in part.
4-55
4.7.2 Procedure for changing the operator qualifications

When the control power is turned on, either USER or BEGINNER is set as the operator qualifications class. If
an operator has the qualifications of EXPERT or above, either class may be set. page 4-58 "4.7.4How to
set the operator qualifications class at power-on”
To change the class of qualifications to Expert or above, use the short-cut code (R314) to make the switch
each and every time it is required. Once the class of qualifications is switched, the new class is held until the
operator qualifications class is switched again or the control power is turned off.
A password is required to change the operator qualifications class to EXPERT or above.

The initial passwords are listed below. The passwords can also be changed.
page 4-57 "4.7.3How to change the passwords”
Table 4.7.3 Initial password

Operator
Password set at the factory Changing the password
qualifications
BEGINNER
(No password provided) (No password provided)
USER
EXPERT None (simply press [Enter]) Password can be changed (using
SPECIALIST 12345 short-cut code R313)
How the passwords work

POINT * If the operator inputs the wrong password, BEGINNER or USER is set as the
operator qualifications class.
* Since the initial passwords for EXPERT and SPECIALIST are given in these
instructions and are open to anyone who reads the instructions, elementary level or
regular operators can easily change their own qualifications to the EXPERT or
SPECIALIST class.
Since there is a danger that the constants and other settings required to operate
the robot may be changed in error by an elementary level or regular operator, the
initial passwords must be changed as soon as the robot is delivered.
How to change the operator qualifications class

1 Press [RESET/R].
>>A table of the short-cut codes now appears.
2 Input "314" using the numeric keys, and press [Enter].

314 >>The password input screen now appears.
The current operator qualifications can be checked on this screen.
3 Input the password for EXPERT or SPECIALIST, and press [Enter].

Pass
word If, for instance, the initial password is to be used and EXPERT is the qualifications
class, press [Enter].
If SPECIALIST is the qualifications class, press "12345" followed by [Enter].
>>The operator qualifications class is now changed.
Operation returns to the original screen by pressing any key.
4-56
4.7.3 How to change the passwords

It is possible to change the passwords (for EXPERT and SPECIALIST).
Alphanumerics (a distinction is made between upper case and lower case letters) and symbols are used as the
characters which can be input for a password. All characters must be half-sized characters only. A password
must not be more than 10 characters long.
EXPERT or SPECIALIST operators must make a note of the new password which they
have changed themselves without fail so that they will not forget it. If an operator has
forgotten a password, the password cannot be set again insofar as he or she does not
CAUTION have a higher class of operator qualifications.
How to change the passwords

1 Press [RESET/R].
>>A table of the short-cut codes now appears.
2 Input "313" using the numeric keys, and press [Enter].

313 >>The password change screen now appears.
3 For a password that consists only of numerals, input the number using the
pass numeric keys, and press [Enter].
word If letters or symbols are to be included in the password, input them from the soft
keyboard by pressing [ENABLE] + [EDIT], and press [Enter].
>>A confirmation message is displayed.
4 To make the change, select [OK], and press [Enter].

>>The password is now changed, and operation returns to the original screen.
To cancel the change, select [CANCEL], and press [Enter].
4-57
4.7.4 How to set the operator qualifications class at power-on

If the operator qualifications class is EXPERT or above, this class can be set to BEGINNER or USER when
the control power is turned on. The class was set to USER at the factory.
How to set the operator qualifications class at power-on

1 Select <Constant Setting> - [1 Control constants] - [8 Protecting level selection].
>>The setting screen now appears.
2 Select either USER or BEGINNER.

＋
3 Press f12 <Complete> key.

>>The setting is changed, and operation returns to the original screen.
4-58
4.8 I/O area mapping function
4.8.1 I/O area mapping

I/O area mapping function is the function to freely change logic input / output signals and allotment of physical
media. By use of this function, it is possible to arrange I/O directly without software PLC. (PLC through input /
output)
Mapping can be changed in unit of 8 points for I/O board signals, and in unit of 512 points for field bus signals.
This controller
I/O mapping
Output signal
Status
Logical signals
Physical signals
signal
Allotment Outside
Input signal
purpose
signals
Input signal
Fig. 4.8.1 Concept of I/O area mapping
At factory shipment, mapping is made as shown below. For example, the head signal output from the I/O board
is fixed to 01 signal.
Table 4.8.1 Factory shipment setting of I/O area mapping

Physical port Logic I/O signal
1 to 8
I/O board 1 9 to 16
(8 points x 4) 17 to 24
25 to 32
33 to 40
I/O board 2 41 to 48
(8 points x 4) 49 to 56
57 to 64
65 to 72
I/O board 3 73 to 80
(8 points x 4) 81 to 88
89 to 96
Arc I/F board
97 to 104
(8 points X 1)
Field bus CH1
161 to 672
(512 points)
Field bus CH2
673 to 1184
(512 points)
Field bus CH3
1185 to 1696
(512 points)
Field bus CH4 1697 to 2208
(512 points) (Actually, up to 2048)
4-59
By use of I/O area mapping function, change is made for example as shown below.
Table 4.8.2 I/O area mapping setting change example
Physical port Logic I/O signal
1 to 8
I/O board 1 9 to 16
Same allotment as usual
(8 points x 4) 17 to 24
25 to 32
I/O board 2
- No input / output with I/O board 2
(8 points x 4)
I/O board 3
- No input / output with I/O board 3
(8 points x 4)
Arc I/F board
- No input / output with Arc I/O board
(8 points X 1)
Field bus CH1
33 to 544 Field bus CH1 is used as signals of 33 to 544.
(512 points)
Field bus CH2
(512 points)
Field bus CH3
- No input / output with field bus CH3.
(512 points)
Field bus CH4
(512 points)
By designating the number of logic signal to be allotted to the physical port, mapping is set. At that time, the
number of logic signal is not written one by one, but it is designated by "port number" which is made into groups in
prior in unit of 8 points.
Table 4.8.3 "Port number" used in I/O area mapping setting

Port Logic I/O signal Port Logic I/O signal Port Logic I/O signal Port Logic I/O signal
1 1-8 65 513 - 520 129 1025 - 1032 193 1537 - 1544
2 9 - 16 66 521 - 528 130 1033 - 1040 194 1545 - 1552
3 17 - 24 67 529 - 536 131 1041 - 1048 195 1553 - 1560
4 25 - 32 68 537 - 544 132 1049 - 1056 196 1561 - 1568
5 33 - 40 69 545 - 552 133 1057 - 1064 197 1569 - 1576
6 41 - 48 70 553 – 560 134 1065 - 1072 198 1577 - 1584
7 49 - 56 71 561 - 568 135 1073 - 1080 199 1585 - 1592
8 57 - 64 72 569 - 576 136 1081 - 1088 200 1593 - 1600
9 65 - 72 73 577 - 584 137 1089 - 1096 201 1601 - 1608
10 73 - 80 74 585 - 592 138 1097 - 1104 202 1609 - 1616
11 81 - 88 75 593 - 600 139 1105 - 1112 203 1617 - 1624
12 89 - 96 76 601 - 608 140 1113 - 1120 204 1625 - 1632
13 97 - 104 77 609 - 616 141 1121 - 1128 205 1633 - 1640
14 105 - 112 78 617 - 624 142 1129 - 1136 206 1637 - 1648
15 113 - 120 79 625 - 632 143 1137 - 1144 207 1649 - 1656
16 121 - 128 80 633 - 640 144 1145 - 1152 208 1657 - 1664
17 129 - 136 81 637 - 648 145 1153 - 1160 209 1665 - 1672
18 137 - 144 82 649 - 656 146 1161 - 1168 210 1673 - 1680
19 145 - 152 83 657 - 664 147 1169 - 1176 211 1681 - 1688
20 153 - 160 84 665 - 672 148 1177 - 1184 212 1869 - 1696
21 161 - 168 85 673 - 680 149 1185 - 1192 213 1697 - 1704
22 169 - 176 86 681 - 688 150 1193 - 1200 214 1705 - 1712
23 177 - 184 87 869 - 696 151 1201 - 1208 215 1713 - 1720
24 185 - 192 88 697 - 704 152 1209 - 1216 216 1721 - 1728
25 193 - 200 89 705 - 712 153 1217 - 1224 217 1729 - 1736
26 201 - 208 90 713 - 720 154 1225 - 1232 218 1737 - 1744
27 209 - 216 91 721 - 728 155 1233 - 1240 219 1745 - 1752
28 217 - 224 92 729 - 736 156 1237 - 1248 220 1753 - 1760
29 225 - 232 93 737 - 744 157 1249 - 1256 221 1761 - 1768
30 233 - 240 94 745 - 752 158 1257 - 1264 222 1769 - 1776
31 237 - 248 95 753 - 760 159 1265 - 1272 223 1777 - 1784
32 249 - 256 96 761 - 768 160 1273 - 1280 224 1785 - 1792
33 257 - 264 97 769 - 776 161 1281 - 1288 225 1793 - 1800
34 265 - 272 98 777 - 784 162 1289 - 1296 226 1801 - 1808
35 273 - 280 99 785 - 792 163 1297 - 1304 227 1809 - 1816
36 281 - 288 100 793 - 800 164 1305 - 1312 228 1817 - 1824
4-60
Port Logic I/O signal Port Logic I/O signal Port Logic I/O signal Port Logic I/O signal
37 289 - 296 101 801 - 808 165 1313 - 1320 229 1825 - 1832
38 297 - 304 102 809 - 816 166 1321 - 1328 230 1833 - 1840
39 305 - 312 103 817 - 824 167 1329 - 1336 231 1837 - 1848
40 313 - 320 104 825 - 832 168 1337 - 1344 232 1849 - 1856
41 321 - 328 105 833 - 840 169 1345 - 1352 233 1857 - 1864
42 329 - 336 106 837 - 848 170 1353 - 1360 234 1865 - 1872
43 337 - 344 107 849 - 856 171 1361 - 1368 235 1873 - 1880
44 345 - 352 108 857 - 864 172 1369 - 1376 236 1881 - 1888
45 353 - 360 109 865 - 872 173 1377 - 1384 237 1889 - 1896
46 361 - 368 110 873 - 880 174 1385 - 1392 238 1897 - 1904
47 369 - 376 111 881 - 888 175 1393 - 1400 239 1905 - 1912
48 377 - 384 112 889 - 896 176 1401 - 1408 240 1913 - 1920
49 385 - 392 113 897 - 904 177 1409 - 1416 241 1921 - 1928
50 393 - 400 114 905 - 912 178 1417 - 1424 242 1929 - 1936
51 401 - 408 115 913 - 920 179 1425 - 1432 243 1937 - 1944
52 409 - 416 116 921 - 928 180 1433 - 1440 244 1945 - 1952
53 417 - 424 117 929 - 936 181 1437 - 1448 245 1953 - 1960
54 425 - 432 118 937 - 944 182 1449 - 1456 246 1961 - 1968
55 433 - 440 119 945 - 952 183 1457 - 1464 247 1969 - 1976
56 437 - 448 120 953 - 960 184 1465 - 1472 248 1977 - 1984
57 449 - 456 121 961 - 968 185 1473 - 1480 249 1985 - 1992
58 457 - 464 122 969 - 976 186 1481 - 1488 250 1993 - 2000
59 465 - 472 123 977 - 984 187 1489 - 1496 251 2001 - 2008
60 473 - 480 124 985 - 992 188 1497 - 1504 252 2009 - 2016
61 481 - 488 125 993 - 1000 189 1505 - 1512 253 2017 - 2024
62 489 - 496 126 1001 - 1008 190 1513 - 1520 254 2025 - 2032
63 497 - 504 127 1009 - 1016 191 1521 - 1528 255 2033 - 2040
64 505 - 512 128 1017 - 1024 192 1529 - 1536 256 2041 - 2048
In the case when physical port is I/O board, mapping is made in unit of 8 points for logic input / output signal.
In the case when physical port is field bus (device net or the like), logic input / output signal is mapped in unit of
512 points. Namely, 64 ports (512 points) continuously are mapped from allotted port number as for field bus
channel.
4-61
4.8.2 Relation with software PLC

When software PLC is used, I/O area mapping function does not work effectively. This is because the rudder
program on software PLC executes I/O area mapping function. However, in mapping by software PLC, delay time
occurs in ON/OFF of signal only for scan time of software PLC in principle.
Therefore, in this function, when software PLC is used, a function to change not all the areas but only
designated area according to mapping information is prepared. This function is called "PLC through" herein. "PLC
through" is the function to directly input / output (through) only designated area to physical port without influence
of software PLC.
For example, in the case without "PLC through" function, even when to output an output O signal as an external
signal as it is, it is necessary to write such a rudder program. But, by use of "PLC through" function, without
writing such to PLC program, it is possible to output directly to the physical port, and PLC program can be
simplified, and scan time can be shortened.
PLC through
Output signal
Status
signal
Logical signals
Physical signals
Software Outside
PLC Input signal
purpose
signals
Input signal
Fig. 4.8.2 Relation with PLC (PLC through I/O)
By the way, this function causes no influence upon software PLC itself, even if a rudder to be operated to signal
of mapping change is written, it itself works normally. (However, actually, designated signals are input / output
made directly with physical port.)
4-62
4.8.3 Setting method

I/O area mapping setting is carried out in the following procedures.
Set the operator qualification to EXPERT or higher. (USER or below can only browse setting contents.)
1 Select teach mode.
2 Select <Constant Setting> - [6 Signals] - [15 Hardware setting].

>>The following setting screen is displayed.
When mapping information is not written in "S00SIGL.CON" file, the above value is
set as default setting.
Meanings of display items are as shown below.

Parameter Description
Number of This shows the number of signal points of each physical medium. 8
points points x 4 for one I/O board. Field bus has 512 points of signals per
channel.
Port This designates the logic signal number of this controller by port
number.
For example, when "1" is designated by I/O board, the range of
corresponding input signal is I1 ~ I8, and output signal is O1 ~ O8.
When "12 is designated by field bus, the range of corresponding
input signal is I1 ~ I512, and output signal is O1 ~ O512.
Signal number The range of signal to input port number is automatically displayed.
PLC through When "input" is checked, the signal concerned is forcibly input
irrespective of the result of PLC program. In the same manner,
when "output" is checked, the signal concerned is forcibly output
irrespective of the result of PLC program. Data not checked is
dependent on the action result of PLC program.
On the contrary, at PLC cutoff, this setting makes no influence.
3 Press f8 <initialize> key, and the setting contents go back to default ones
(contents shown in 2).
4 Move the cursor to each logic port, and input numeric value of mapping
information by port number.
When "0" is input, no input / output with the physical medium.
Number
5 At PLC execution, when to directly input / output only specified area without via
PLC, check the "PLC through " of the area.
Move the cursor to desired " PLC through ", and press [Enable] and [1] at the
same time to check it. By pressing [Enable] [2], it is unchecked.
4-63
6 After completion of all the settings, press the f12 <Complete> key.
>>The software checks whether there is duplication in the set area. If duplication is
found, a popup message showing setting error is displayed. Press [Enter] and the
cursor moves onto the place of duplication, so correct setting data.
In the same manner, even when all the ports are set as 0, a popup message
showing setting error is displayed, so press [Enter] and carry out setting.
7 If there is contradiction in set data, a confirmation message whether to actually

execute or not is displayed.
When [Cancel] is selected, setting is not carried out. (Not exit from this screen) Select
[OK] and press [Enter], and the set data is written into "S00SIGL.CON" file, and you
can exit this screen.
8 According to the message, turn off the controller once and then turn it on
again.
You cannot exit the message unless turning the controller power OFF -> ON.
After changing mapping, according to the message, turn off the controller once and then
turn it on again. This is necessary to initialize mapping information.
CAUTION
Once I/O mapping is changed, beware that all the output signals are cleared (OFF) after
IMPORTANT power restart.
As the result of setting, when signal number exceeds 2048, field bus signal is limited to
2048 unconditionally.
IMPORTANT For example, the signal range in the case where "251" is designated to the logic port
number of field bus is 2001 to 2048. (The number of signals is 48 points.)
As the number of signal points of field bus is 512 points, the logic port number of each
channel must be away at least "64" or more. If not away, press <Complete> key, error
IMPORTANT message of area duplication is displayed, and setting cannot be made.
4-64
4.8.4 Example 1 : Using only field bus as external I/O signals with PLC disconnected
For example, here are some mapping setting examples. (Shaded portions are items to be set.)
Even when only field bus is input / output with outside, normally 1888 points of 161 ~ 2048 are allotted to field
bus signal.
When this is set as shown below, input / output signals of field bus are mapped to 1 ~ 2048, all the 2048 points
can be used.
Table 4.8.4 Mapping example (making only field bus as external input / output signal with PLC disconnected)
Physical medium (number of Logic I/O signal PLC through
Port
signal points) number Input Output
8 0 － Ignored Ignored
I/O board 1
I/O board 2
I/O board 3
Arc I/F board 8 0 - Ignored Ignored
Field bus CH1 512 1 1 to 512 Ignored Ignored
POINT In the case of PLC cutoff, check mark in PLC through process has no meaning.
4-65
4.8.5 Example 2: Using only I/O board 1 – field bus CH1 with PLC disconnected
When to use 32 points of I/O board 1 and 512 points of field bus channel 1 as continuous signals, make the
setting as shown below.
Table 4.8.5 Mapping example (using only I/O board 1 - field bus CH1 with PLC disconnected)
Port
8 1 1 to 8 Ignored Ignored
I/O board 1
I/O board 2
I/O board 3
Arc I/F board 8 0 - Ignored Ignored
Field bus CH2 512 0 － Ignored Ignored
4-66
4.8.6 Example 3: Forcibly inputting / outputting signals of I/O board 1 as I1-I32 with PLC
enabled
When to forcibly input the input signals from I/O board 1 as I1 to I32, irrespective of PLC, and forcibly output
033 to 064 to I/O board 2, make the setting as shown below.
Table 4.8.6 Mapping example (forcibly inputting / outputting signals of I/O board 1 as
I1-I32 signals with PLC enabled)
Port
8 1 1 to 8 Checked
8 2 9 to 16 Checked
I/O board 1
8 3 17 to 24 Checked
I/O board 2
8 Ignored ？
8 Ignored ？
I/O board 3
8 Ignored ？
8 Ignored ？
Arc I/F board 8 Ignored ？
Field bus CH1 512 Ignored ？
Even when mapping is changed by use of this function, there is no influence upon PLC
POINT relay number of physical medium. Even if the setting is made as shown above, for
example, relay number of I/O board 2 remains X64 to X95 - Y64 to Y95.
And, their relay coil functions normally. (However, the status of coils Y64 ~ Y95 is not
output to I/O board 2. Output is the status of 33 to 064.)
POINT Only signals checked in PLC through process are forcibly input / output.
Other signals are dependent on assembled PLC.
In the table, logic ports of items not related to forcible input / output are ignored, however,
POINT they must be set so that their signal area should not overlap.
At execution of PLC, logic port numbers of items not checked have no meaning, therefore,
it is an effective method to input "0" expressly and avoid duplicated check of area.
4-67
4.9 High Speed Interference Detection
4.9.1 Outline of High Speed Interference Detection

High speed interference detection function aims at protecting the tool by detecting and preventing collision of
the tool and peripheral equipments. By utilizing this function, when mis-operation occurs during teaching work or
some error occurs during playback, unexpected interference is detected to stop the robot immediately.
4.9.2 Applied machine types

A robot in which a “Interference Setting” f-key is displayed in <Constant Setting> - [3 Machine Constants] - [1
Tool Constants] screen can use this function. Normally, there are no data to be set at the setting screen that is
displayed by pressing this f-key. Necessary parameters are set by system software automatically.
4.9.3 Parameters that must be set in advance to use this function

To use this function properly, the parameters listed below must be set properly in advance.
・ C of G [mm]
・ Weight [kg]
・ Inertia [kgm2]
If these parameters are not set accurately, incorrect detection may occur (interference
is not detected, or detected although interference never happens). Be sure to set the
CAUTION correct tool constants by referring to "4.5 Tool constant settings".
4-68
4.9.4 “Interference setting” screen

Table 4.9.1 Interference setting parameter

Item Description
"Low sensitive"
This is used when tool weight and C.O.G setting is not completed.
The detection sensitivity is set moderately so as to prevent mistake in interference
detection.
"Normal sensitive"
This is set when precise setting of tool weight and C.O.G. is completed.
Mode Threshold value for detection is lower than that of “Low sensitive”.
(Notes) After performing the automatic tool weight and C.O.G. setting
procedure, this setting is automatically set to “Normal sensitive”. Not needed to
change this setting manually.
This sets the detection level [kgfm] in teach mode when the mode is set to "Normal
Teach
sensitive”.
This sets the detection level [kgfm] in playback mode when the mode is set to "Normal
Level 0
sensitive".
This sets high sensitivity detection level [kgfm] in playbackmode when the mode is set to
"Normal sensitive". This level becomes enabled when 1 is set to the argument of FN230
Level 1
(interference detection level selection function). As for details, refer to the interference
detection level selection function in the next section.
4-69
4.9.5 Switching Detection Level by Function

It is possible to switch the threshold value regarded as interference during playback.
For example, when inserting the end effector into narrow space, interference is checked strictly by changing
the threshold value lower. On the other hand, when carrying out the contact work, threshold value had better
be changed to larger in order to prevent from mistake in interference detection.
For switching, "interference detection level selection function" is used. Details are as shown below.
Pneumonic Number Japanese name

COLSEL FN230 Interference detection level selection function
Parameter
Data Contents, setting range
Parameter No.1 Level number This designates detection level number.
(0 to 3) 0: Normal use condition. The threshold value of level 0 is used
(default).
1: This switches to specification condition at high sensitivity.
The threshold value of level 1 is used.
2: This is designated when to get low sensitivity. The threshold
value of low sensitivity at factory shipment is used.
3: This is designated when to disable interference function.
This can be set only by EXPERT or above.
Unless this function is used, the threshold value set to level 0 is used always at playback.
At teaching, this function is carried out, but in the case of 0 and 1, all detection level of teach are used.
In the case when this function is executed, designated detection level is used until this function is executed
for the next time.
Detection level automatically becomes 0 (level 0) at step 0 replay of program. However, in the case of
program call, even in step 0, it does not automatically become 0 (level 0).
Even if it is stopped halfway and restarted, level is not switched. However, if step is selected, level
automatically becomes 0, so when level is changed, use it with care.
4.9.6 As for the mistake in interference detection

Mistake in interference detection may happen in following cases.
No. Situation
1 Tool constants such as C.O.G., weight and moment of inertia are much different from the
actual values.
2 Plural axes move violently at the same time
3 Power supply voltage is low
If mistake in interference detection happens, check above situations at first. If everything is OK, try to change
the threshold value or change to disabled by recording FN230(COLSEL) only around trouble steps.
Refer to “4.9.5 Switching Detection Level by Function” for FN230(COLSEL).
4.9.7 Trouble shooting

If interference is detected, please check the items listed below.
1. Check if the manipulator interferes with something or not.

2. Check if the tool settings (weight, C.O.G., inertia) match the actual load condition or not.
3. Lower the detection sensitivity level around the steps in which the interference is miss-detected or disable
the detection function itself using FN230(COLSEL).
4. Check if the axis in which the error is detected has mechanical problems or not e.g. using brake release
switch etc.
5. Check the wirings between the controller and the manipulator. (e.g. U,V,W phases current connection of the
motor power, brake control lines, etc.)
6. Replace the unit (IPM drive unit) that includes brake power supply.
4-70
4.10 Setting the application type

In the <Constant Setting> - [12 Format and Configuration] - [7 Application] menus, you can enable various related
functions, optimize the f key layout, and configure other settings in accordance with the application of the robot
(application type). Although these settings are in most cases configured prior to shipment from the factory, they
can be configured as necessary while referring to this section.
Only configure these settings once prior to the first time of use. Inadvertently changing
them later may cause problems such as the initialization of various settings and the
CAUTION inability to use functions that were used up until that time.
Up to two application types per unit can be set. For example, if the robot can be used for both spot welding and
handling, set "Usage1" to [Spot Welding] and "Usage2" to [Handling].
Configuration example
1 First, input R314 and select operator qualification EXPERT or above.
2 Select teach mode and <Constant Setting> - [12 Format and Configuration].
>>The following setting menu appears.
3 Select [7 Application] from the menu.

>>The following setting screen appears.
4-71
4 Align the cursor with "Usage1" or "Usage2", and press [Enter] key.
If, for example, the robot is also to be used for a spot welding application, select
[Spot Welding] for "Usage1" and [Handling] for "Usage2".
>>A list of application selection candidates appears. Use the up or down cursor to
select [Handling] and press [Enter] key again.
5 After completion of the settings, press the f12 <Complete> key.

The settings are written to the controller general constant file C00ctrl.con.
To stop configuring the settings, press the [RESET/R] key.
At present, the following application types can be selected.
Standard: The standard functions are enabled.

Spot Welding: For spot welding with a spot welding gun.
Brastering (Option) For thermal spray with a thermal spray gun.
Handling: For using the robot for a handling application.
Arc Welding: For arc welding with an arc welding torch.
Sealing: For sealing with a sealing gun.
Glass Transfer: For handling glass substrates.
Table 4.10.1 Items settable by unit

Item Description
Specify the application (usage) for the unit. The function
Usage1 commands (FN) and shortcuts that can be used vary depending
the application that is set.
Set this when one unit is to be used for multiple applications.
Usage2
Normally set this to [Standard].
Specify the optimized control parameters to enable optimum
Tuning control for the application.
(Note that some mechanisms have no optimized parameters.)
Soft Key Set the optimum soft key (f key) layout for the application type.
Table 4.10.2 Items common to all units

Item Description
Initialize the input and output signals to a format suitable for the
Signal Format
application.
Function group Initialize the function group to a format suitable for the
initialization application. (This item is currently unavailable).
4-72
4.11 Setting the [CLAMP / ARC] key

Any one of the following functions can be set for
the [CLAMP/ARC] key of the hardware keys of the
teach pendant.
(1) Function to turn specific output signals

ON/OFF manually
(2) Spot welding function
(3) Arc welding function
(4) FLEX-HAND function
When the application is handling, an end effector

such as a gripper is usually attached to the robot.
This key can be used to open and close the gripper
if the signal to open and close the gripper is
assigned to function 1 above. Furthermore, this
function is also compatible with grippers that use [CLAMP/ARC] key
double solenoids because it is possible to assign
two output signals and configure them to switch Fig. 4.11.1 [CLAMP/ARC] key
the gripper ON and OFF alternatively. of the teach pendant
The function of (1) and its usage are described hereinafter. As for (2), (3) and (4), please refer to the instruction
manuals “APPLICATION MANUAL SPOTWELDING”, “APPLICATION MANUAL ARC WELDING” and
“FLEX-HAND function”.
When the application is spot welding or arc welding, the [CLAMP/ARC] key is initially set
for using the corresponding welding function and the key cannot be used to turn a signal
CAUTION ON/OFF manually.
Setting Procedure
1 First, input R314 and select operator qualification EXPERT or above.
2 Select teach mode and <Constant Setting> - [7 f-Keys].

>>The following f-keys menu for the teach pendant appears.
3 Select [5 Usage of Clamp Key] from the menu.

>>The following setting screen appears.
4 Align the cursor with "Clamp Key" and press the [ENABLE] and left or right
＋ cursor keys together to align the cursor to "Output Signal".
4-73
5 Next, align the cursor to "Alloc Signal," input the number of the output signal
for opening and closing the gripper, and press [Enter] key.
Two output signals can be registered. If just one signal is to be used, set "1"
Number only.
If two signals are to be used as is the case with double solenoids, set the two
signals you want to use to switch ON and OFF alternatively for "1" and "2."
• The same signal cannot be input for both signal 1 and signal 2.
• When you want to set a multiple-output signal, set it for signal 1 only.
Two multiple-output signals cannot be set.
• Signals that have already been assigned cannot be set.
• If 0 is set for the signal number, the key has no function.
• Even if the application differs depending on the unit, only one
application can be set for the clamp key for safety reasons.
6 After completion of the settings, press the f12 <Complete> key.

The settings are written to the controller general constant file C00ctrl.con.
To stop configuring the settings, press the [RESET/R] key.
Using Clamp/Arc key (normal operation)
1 Just pressing the [CLAMP/ARC] key has no effect when the signal ON/OFF
function has been set for the key. Furthermore, a function command cannot be
registered.
Using Clamp/Arc key (with [ENABLE] key)
(1) When a general-purpose output signal is set

1 In teach mode, the set output signal can be turned ON/OFF manually.
＋ Using the signal assigned to signal 1 of the clamp key output as the reference
signal, output is performed by switching between ON and OFF alternatively.
The ON/OFF state of the output signal assigned to signal 2 is always the
opposite to that of signal 1.
>>Pressing the [ENABLE] and [CLAMP/ARC] keys when signal 1 is OFF.

→Signal 1 is set to ON and signal 2 is set to OFF, regardless of the state of signal 2.
>>Pressing the [ENABLE] and [CLAMP/ARC] keys when signal 1 is ON.
→Signal 1 is set to OFF and signal 2 is set to ON, regardless of the state of signal 2.
(2) When a multiple-output signal is set

1 In teach mode, the set multiple-output signal can be output manually.
＋ >>The following dialog box for inputting the output data appears.
2 Input decimal numbers for the data you want to output and press [Enter] key.
>>The registered output signal is turned ON/OFF in accordance with the specified
Number numerical value.
4-74
4.12 Setting the software limit (operating range)
4.12.1 Outline
The software limit (operating range) is set to the maximum operating range prior to shipment from the factory.
If the positions of the "stopper" and "limit switch" are changed or the operating area is changed for operational
reasons, be sure to also change the software limit. There are the following three ways of setting the software
limit. For these operations, an operator class EXPERT or higher is necessary.
(1) Position Recording

The robot is actually operated to move each of its axes to the position you want to set as the
software limit and then the [REC] key is pressed. For the actual operation, refer to the following
pages.
(2) Data Input

The software limit can be set without having to move the robot by inputting hexadecimals for the
encoder values. Because of the nature of inputting numeric values and the difficulty of predicting
the operating area, be extremely careful when configuring these settings. From "A" to "F" can be
inputted via the following keys.
Table 4.12.1 How to input the hexadecimal values (A to F)

A B C D E F
＋＋＋＋＋＋
This menu is convenient in case that software limit value of one robot is copied to that of
POINT another robot which is same type.
Software limit values (hexadecimals) to be input must be calculated beforehand.
(3) Auto Setting

The software limit range is calculated automatically from the posture data of programs
registered in the internal memory of the controller and then set. Press <Select> key to select the
programs from the list and then put the check marks for the axes to be used for the calculation.
When the <Complete> key is pressed, the software limit (operating range) is automatically
calculated. If it is necessary, set the margin parameters and then save the result with <Complete>
key. When the software limit is set automatically, only the robot posture data included in programs
is used to calculate the software limit. Therefore, an error may be generated if an interpolation
operation results in the robot attempting a movement that exceeds the software limit. After setting
the software limit automatically, confirm that all programs move the robot without a problem.
Furthermore, if an error is generated, adjust the ±margin values.
The software limit function is not for defining the limit area*. To change the limit area, use
the "stopper" and "limit switch".
Unexpected robot motion leading to a person being hit or caught may result in loss of life,
serious injury, or an accident.
DANGER * Limit area: The area the robot cannot move out of even if there is a failure or
malfunction with the robot system.
When software limit is changed, please do not forget to confirm that robot surely stops at
the defined software limit by manual operation. If this procedure is omitted, wrong setting
by mistaking operation may result in loss of life, serious injury, or an accident.
WARNING
The following items are not supported for auto setting of the software limit.
(1) Servo gun axis*(The checkmark cannot be turned ON)
(2) Endless axis*(The checkmark cannot be turned ON)
(3) Other than angle commands of robotic language for each axis angle (MOVE/
MOVEJ/MOVEX_J/MOVEX_E)
CAUTION * Calculation is not performed automatically, but values can be input directly in the data
input area.
4-75
4.12.2 [Position record] screen settings

Operate the robot to move each of its axes manually and set the software limit values.
The operator needs to have the EXPERT qualification set to perform this operation.
1 Select <Constant Setting> - [3 Machine Constant] - [5 Software Limit] and press

<Record Posi.>
>>The following [Position Record] screen appears.
2 Align the cursor with the target axis and operate the robot manually to move
each axis to a position you want to set for the software limit.
3 Press [Enter] key and then press [REC] key.

>>The software limit values are overwritten.
4 Press the <Complete> key.

>> The software limit values are registered and the [3 Machine Constant] menu
reappears.
By moving robot, check the relationship between the rotating direction and the
increase/decrease of encoder data without fail. If “max” value and “min” value is set
opposite by mistake, robot can never move. In this case, please modify these values by
CAUTION utilizing [Input Value] menu.
4-76
4.13 User defined error
4.13 User defined error

It is possible to define an error message and this error can be displayed on the teach pendant screen using
input signal. The content of the message can be edited.
Setting procedure
1 Open <Service Utilities> - [25 Robot Diagnosis] [6 User Error].
Edit the existing user error.
Copy the content of the current user error to the other error number.
Delete (initialize) the current user error.

2 After setting the respective items, press <Complete>.
>>The settings are saved to the internal memory.
3 When the “Input Signal” is turned ON, the error window is displayed.
Item Description
Failure code This is the error number. (7001 to 7099)
Input Signal This is the trigger signal (input signal) to display the error. (0 to 2048)
Select the type of the error (Error / Alarm / Information)
Failure Type For details, refer to the following manual.
“CONTROL AND MAINTENANCE FUNCTION” Chapter 4
Input the error message
Character input screen is displayed by [Enable] + [Edit].
Failure message
Input the error content.
Failure content Character input screen is displayed by [Enable] + [Edit].
Input the measures.
Measures Character input screen is displayed by [Enable] + [Edit].
4-77
4.14 User coordinate system

If a “User coordinate system” is defined in advance, the teaching operation may become easier in some
cases. (E.g. in a case in which the work-table installation direction is not parallel with the machine (robot)
coordinate system)
- To define a user coordinate system, a program that has 3 MOVE commands is
necessary.
- Please make an accurate setting of a TOOL (especially, TCP position) in advance.
POINT - To create a user coordinate system with accurate direction, it is recommended to use
the edge points of the table. (The distance between each point should be as far as
possible)
- User coordinate system can be defined up to 100.
4.14.1 Setting example

How to define a user coordinate system
1 First, please create a program that has 3 MOVE commands to define a user
coordinate system. In this example, 3 steps are recorded in the Program No.1.
1 : The origin(reference point) of the user coordinate system
2 : A point that determine the X axis direction
3 : A point that determine the Y axis direction
(The direction of the Z axis is automatically calculated.)
2
Z
X
Y
1
2 Open <Service Utilities> - [10 User Coord. Definition].

>>The following screen will be displayed.
4-78
3 Enter the number of the program created in the procedure 1 (=”1”) and press
[Enter].
>>The program is scanned and a new user coordinate system 1 is defined.
“Step Order”
OXY : Origin, a point to determine the X direction, a point to determine the Y direction
OZX : Origin, a point to determine the Z direction, a point to determine the X direction
OYZ : Origin, a point to determine the Y direction, a point to determine the Z direction
4 Press <Complete>
>>The defined user coordinate system 1 is saved in the internal memory.
5 Press [R] key several times to exit from the setting menu.
Register the user coordinate system to the manual operation coordinate system
1 Open <Constant Setting> - [5 Operation Constants] - [5 Coordinate registration]
2 Change the setting like the followings;
＋ “3 Coord.3” = “User”
“6 Coordinates 3 No.” = “1” (The No. of the defined user coordinate system)
3 Press <Complete>
>>The setting is saved in the internal memory.
4 Press [R] key several times to exit from the menu screen.
5 Press [INTERP/COORD] key several times.

>>”User coordinate system” icon will show up on the screen. The number shows the
user coordinate system number currently being used.
4-79
6 Try to move the robot using the axis operation keys.

>>The robot moves along the user coordinate system.
(X,Y,Z) = (0,0,0)
4-80
4.14.2 Stationary tool

A tool that is fixed on the floor is called as “Stationary tool”. (e.g. stationary sealing gun, etc.) And the TCP
and the direction of the stationary tool can be defined by using the user coordinate system.
- In case of an application that requires the path accuracy, please prepare an accurate
tool constant when defining the user coordinate system. (For example, please use a
sharp wire or a pin fixed on the robot hand.) And, because this tool constant is used only
for defining the user coordinate system, the constant should be set to TOOL32 for
example.)
POINT - In case of a stationary spot welding gun (pedestal gun), the user coordinate system is
not used. But the press direction (direction of the Z axis) of the welding gun mechanism
must be set in the following menu.
<Constant Setting> - [12 Format and Configuration] - [5 Installation Angle]
For details about the stationary welding gun, refer to the following instruction manual.
“FD CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL / For Expert operators SERVO GUN
ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE” Section 1.9.5 “Installation Position Setting”
How to define a user coordinate system for a stationary tool

1 Move the robot tool tip to the position of the stationary tool tip, and record the
position as the origin (reference point 1). And then record other 2 points referring
to the following picture.
Z
3
Y
(NOTE)
In case of a sealing gun, please use the point shown in the following picture as the
origin. This “Clearance” is the distance between the stationary tool tip (nozzle of the
sealing gun) and the surface of the work-piece.
Stationary
tool
The tool to define

the stationary tool
(user coordinate
Stationary
system)
tool TCP
Clearance
(Figure) Point the origin of the stationary coordinate system’s origin using the robot tool
tip (TCP).
2 Define a user coordinate system using this program. (See “4.14.1Setting
example”)
>>Via the operations in the following pages, this user coordinate system can be used as
a “Stationary tool coordinate system”.
4-81
How to operate the robot based on the stationary tool interpolation

When the following 2 conditions are satisfied, the robot can be operated manually based on the stationary tool.
1: “User coordinate system” is selected as the manual operation coordinate system.
2: <Service Utilities> - [1 Teach / Play Condition] [12 Interpolation origin] is set to “Stationary”.
1 Select the user coordinate system (=Stationary tool) for the manual operation.
2 Open <Teach / Play Condition> screen and set the “Interpolation origin” to
“Stationary”.
>>The interpolation type in the recording status bar will change to “S-LIN”
＋
If “S-LIN” is not displayed, please press [Enable] + [INTERP/COORD].
＋
3 When moving the robot with manual operation, the robot moves based on the
stationary tool. For example, the robot will rotate around the Z axis of the
stationary tool when pressing the [RZ-][RZ+] keys.
(Supplement)
When other coordinate system is selected, the stationary tool interpolation in the manual
axis operation is disabled temporary.
4 If [REC] key is pressed, a MOVE command with “S-LIN” interpolation will be

recorded in the program.
But, to execute a stationary tool interpolation while playing back a program, it is

necessary to select the user coordinate system that is used as a stationary tool in
advance. For this, please use “FN67 STOOL”. (See the next page)
4-82
An example of a program to use a stationary tool
1 First, execute “FN67 STOOL” to select the user coordinate system for the
stationary tool interpolation.
2 Step 2, 3, and 4 should be recorded like the following pictures.
Turn the
4
work-piece (90deg)
3 4
3 4
2
2
2 3
3 The interpolation type for the step3 and the Step4 should be set to “S-LIN”.
Method 1
(1) Open <Teach / Play Condition> screen and set the “Interpolation origin” to
“Stationary”.
(2) The interpolation type in the recording status bar will change to “S-LIN”
(3) When pressing the [REC] key, a step of interpolation type “S-LIN” will be recorded.
Method 2
(1) After recording a MOVE command, open the edit screen and place the cursor to the
position of interpolation type of the step.
(2) Press [1], [Enter], [1], [Enter] sequently.

(3) “S-LIN” is set like this picture.
(4) After setting “S-LIN” for the desired steps, press <Complete> to save.
4 When performing CHECK GO operation from the step0, the robot will be
controlled so that the stationary tool’s tip will go along the edge of the work-piece
while executing the Step3 and 4.
3 4
3 4
2
2
2 3
4-83
4.15 How to copy the softkey settings between the controllers
4.15 How to copy the softkey settings between the

controllers
It is possible to copy the software-key settings between the controllers. (Import / export)
This function is convenient when it is necessary to use several controllers with a same setting.
EXPORT AC**TPKEY.CON IMPORT

(File Write) (File Read)
This operation should be performed after switching the operator class to EXPERT or higher.
4.15.1 Exporting the setting file

Let’s export the soft-key setting to the USB memory (RC Ex.Mem1).
(Please insert an USB memory to this robot controller in advance.)
Operating procedure
1 Open <Constant Setting> - [7 f-Keys] [1 Softkey Condition].
2 Press <File Write>

>>The following window is displayed.
4-84
3 Select “YES” and then press [Enter].

4 After selecting the destination folder for the export (In this case, “RC Ex.Mem1”),
press <Execute>.
>>The following message is displayed.
5 Input the 2 digits (1-99) and press [Enter]. In this example, input “11” and press
[Enter].
6 (If necessary) input the comment and press <Execute>.

>>In this example, the setting will be exported with the following file name.
AC11TPKEY.CON
7 Connect the USB memory to the other FD controller.
4-85
4.15.2 Importing the setting file

Let’s import the setting file that was exported to the USB memory in the previous section.
(Please insert the USB memory to the robot controller in advance.)
Operating procedure
1 Open <Constant Setting> - [7 f-Keys] [1 Softkey Condition].
2 Press <File Read>

3 Select “YES” and press [Enter].

4 Select the “AC**TPKEY.CON” in the USB memory (RC Ex. Mem1) using the
[Cursor key] and the [Enter] key and then press <Execute>.
>>The file is imported and the following window will be displayed.
4-86
In case of Spot welding specification, the following screen may be displayed.
Normally, select “NO”. When “NO” is selected, the “Spot Constant (CODE 2082)”
softkey is automatically changed to “No function (CODE 0)”.
POINT
->
2082 (Spot Constant) 0 (No function)
5 Press <Complete>.
>>The settings will be enabled.
4-87
NOTE
4-88
Chapter 5 Spot welding setup
This chapter is aimed at operators who intend to use the robot for spot welding
applications, and it describes the setup work specifically for these applications.
5.1 Overview of setup work ........................................................................... 5-1

5.2 Assignment of spot welding input/output signals ..................................... 5-2
5.2.1 Spot welding input signals............................................................... 5-2
5.2.2 Spot welding output signals............................................................. 5-2
5.3 Settings inherent to a servo gun .............................................................. 5-4
5.3.1 Servo gun condition ........................................................................ 5-4
5.3.2 Tip consumption detection .............................................................. 5-7
5.1Overview of setup work
5.1 Overview of setup work

Depending on the drive system of the welding
gun used, spot welding is classified into two kinds:
"air gun" and "servo gun." The air welding gun is
driven pneumatically whereas the servo welding
gun is driven by servo control.
Due to differences in the control method, the
steps taken for setup differ between the two kinds
of spot welding.
(Gun shape differs from one manufacturer to another)
Fig. 5.1.1 Example of servo gun
Many more steps need to be taken for the setup in the case of a servo gun compared with an air gun since a
servo gun involves the registration of machine constants—specifically the "mechanism constants" for exercising
servo control over the gun axes—and of the servo tuning parameters, the measurement of the bending
characteristics, and so on. Normally, however, this kind of servo drive mechanism is installed and set up
appropriately at the factory so that customer does not have to take this action themselves. The items shaded in
the figure below correspond to these steps.
This section does not go into these steps, and it describes only the setup work (non-shaded area) which must be
carried out by the customer after delivery.
Fig. 5.1.2 Overview of spot welding setup work
If the servo gun is to be installed and adjusted by customer the work in the shaded section must be performed.
This work must be done by an operator who has the qualifications of an EXPERT or above, that is to say, who
is well versed in the operation of the controller. Refer to following manuals. For details on the operator
qualifications, refer to Chapter 4 "Setup".
Instruction manual “APPLICATION MANUAL SPOT WELDING”

Or Instruction manual “SERVO GUN ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE FOR EXPERTS”
5-1
5.2Assignment of spot welding input/output signals
5.2 Assignment of spot welding input/output signals

In this section, the signal attributes used specifically for spot welding applications will be described. These
signals include the gun pressure output signal and welding completed (WI) input signal. Whereas the basic
signal attributes are used as the standard signals with all applications, the signals described in this section are
used only for spot welding applications.
The operating procedure for assigning the signal attributes is exactly the same as for the basic signal attributes.
If the robot delivered has "spot welding" set as its application, some of the signals were already assigned at the
factory.
Among the signals are the ones used with air guns only, the ones used with servo guns only, and the ones used
for both types of guns. "○" in the table denotes a signal which is used. "–" denotes a signal which is not used
even if it has been assigned.
As for the signal that is not written here, please refer to the instruction manual “APPLICATION MANUAL SPOT
WELDING”.
5.2.1 Spot welding input signals
Table 5.2.1 Spot welding input signals

Basic input signal Factory-set Air Servo
Function
designation Input signal Gun Gun
This signal requests that the fact that the welding
Weld 26
has been completed be input from the welder
complete (WI) (Connector
(timer contactor). ○ ○
pin#34)
When this signal is input, the gun release is started
W2 to W6 0
in order for the gun to move to the next step.
Welding ON, welding OFF or pressurizing OFF is
selected by means of external signals. The
27 combinations of these signals are presented
In weld (Connector below. For the individual statuses, refer to the ○ ○
pin#35) "Basic spot welding operations" in the Basic
Operations Manual.
Welding ON and welding OFF can be switched by
means of external signals only when the "Welding
On/Off" spot welding condition has been set to
"Signal." The pressurizing OFF status, however, is
established simply as a result of the input of the
pressurizing OFF signal regardless of this setting.
"Pressurizing
"Weld ON"
OFF" Status
No squeeze 0 Input signal ○ ○
Input signal
ON ON →Pressurizing
OFF
ON OFF →Weld ON
OFF ON →Pressurizing
OFF
OFF OFF →Weld ON
5.2.2 Spot welding output signals

Table 5.2.2 Spot welding output signals
Basic Output signal Factory-set Air Servo
Function
designation Output signal Gun Gun
This is output when the step in which the spot
welding command (SPOT: FN119) has been
17
recorded is played back. It is also output during
Gun squeeze (Connector ○ ○
manual pressurizing operations in the teach
pin#19)
mode.
Only welder 1 (W1) is initially assigned.
This is the signal for opening the air gun fully.
18
It is output when semi-open has been set with
Gun Full open (Connector ○ －
"Stroke" in the spot weld sequence.
pin#20)
Only welder 1 (W1) is initially assigned.
5-2
5.2Assignment of spot welding input/output signals
Basic Output signal Factory-set Air Servo

Function
designation Output signal Gun Gun
This is the signal for opening the air gun
Gun half open 0 halfway. It is output when semi-open has been ○ －
set with "Stroke" in the spot weld sequence.
This is output when the "Weld Signal" in the
spot welding sequence has been set to "Output
Weld command 0 ○ ○
provided" and the spot welding command is
played back in the welding ON status.
The "Welding condition output data" which has
Weld condition 0 been set as the spot welding conditions is ○ ○
output. The signal range from 1 to 16.
In the case of an air gun, the [Pressure control]
data specified by the spot welding conditions is
output discretely.
Pressure ctrl 0 ○ －
Use this when air guns that employ an
electropneumatic proportional valve, etc. to
control the welding force are used.
19
<This function is not supported at the present
Welder warning (Connector ○ ○
time.>
pin #21)
5-3
5.3Settings inherent to a servo gun
5.3 Settings inherent to a servo gun

When an air gun is used, there is no need to read through this section.
A number of technical terms relating to spot welding will appear in this section. To find out what these terms
mean, read through the section on basic spot welding operations in the Basic Operation Manual before
proceeding.
The "servo gun usage conditions" and " servo gun tip consumption " parameters that are concerned with how to
determine the position of the open stroke and other aspects of operating the servo gun are set here. Prior to
shipment from the factory, the general initial settings were already performed. Therefore, under normal
circumstances, no changes need to be made by customer. Outlined in this section are a number of terms and
parameters with which an operator must at the very least be familiar in order to proceed with the basic teaching
using the servo gun.
For an explanation of all the parameters displayed, refer to the operating manual “APPLICATION MANUAL
SPOT WELDING”.
5.3.1 Servo gun condition

The servo gun conditions are the general conditions that come into play when the servo gun is to be used.
There are two kinds of parameters, ones which are common to all spot welding tools and ones which are for
individual tools.
2 Select the <Spot Constant> f key. The same menu can be selected by pressing
[8.Spot welding application] from <Constant Setting> f key.
>>The constant setting menu used exclusively for spot welding such as the one
Menu items for title No.3 and following are displayed only when servo guns have
been set.
3 Align the cursor with [5 Working condition of Servo Gun] and press [Enter] key.
>>A setting screen such as the one shown below now appears.
(Screen showing the settings common to all guns)
5-4
4 The setting screen corresponding to the number of pre-defined spot welding

tools now appears. If a multiple number of spot welding tools have been
defined, input the number in the edit box at the very top of the screen and press
the [Enter] key or press the <Prev gun> or <Next gun> f key to switch the spot
welding tool number.
5 Some parameters are defined for each spot welding tools while others are
common to all spot welding tools.
"0" is set in the gun number field at the very top of the screen for the common
parameters. Set the number "1" or above for the parameters specific to
individual guns.
(Screen for performing settings for an individual gun)
6 If there is an edit box, input the appropriate number, and press [Enter] key.
If the radio buttons (the horizontal rows of selector buttons) are used, press the
＋ [ENABLE] and left or right cursor keys at the same time to select their settings.
If the combo box (box with the arrow at the far right) is used, align the cursor
with it, and press the [Enter] key. A table with a list of selection candidates now
appears. Use the up or down cursor key to select the chosen candidate, and
press [Enter] key again.
7 Upon completion of the settings, press <Complete> f key.

The settings are written in the spot welding constant file.
(To stop editing at any time, press [RESET/R] key.)
5-5
Only the basic parameters will be described below. For an explanation of all the parameters displayed, refer to
the operating manual “APPLICATION MANUAL SPOT WELDING”.
Table 5.3.1 Servo gun conditions (common data)

Factory
Parameter Description of function
settings
Bend coef. at record Low rigid Low rigid work piece: The position is modified by the entire bending
work amount during step recording.
piece Select.: This depends on the setting for "Panel rigid type " among the
spot teach/playback condition menu items. If "Low rigid"
applies, the position is modified by the
entire bending amount; if "High rigid" applies, it is modified by
the bending amount on the movement side.
Table 5.3.2 Servo gun conditions (individual data)

Factory
settings
Large opening end 50mm This specifies the distance at which the
moving side electrode and fixed side
electrode have opened maximally
during manual opening/closing. This
distance must be set inside the soft limit.
In the case of a gun without a battery,
the gun is set to this position after
returning to its home point.
Stroke 1 40mm Since the gun axis is servo-controlled,
the gun can be stopped at any position
but, with a view to facilitating the
teaching process, the design enables
Stroke 2 35mm stroke switching by a single-action
operation. When the <Stroke select> f
key is pressed, stroke switching
Stroke 3 30mm operations can be performed in one go
for a total of four settings, namely,
stroke 1, stroke 2, stroke 3 and wide
release value.
Pressurization stroke 20mm This parameter specifies the distance
when the moving side electrode and
fixed side electrode have closed
maximally during manual
opening/closing. A value lower than the
large opening end end default value
must be set without fail.
Moving side 0mm This parameter specifies the distance between the moving (or fixed)
clearance side electrode and the work immediately prior to pressurizing when
the spot welding command (SPOT: FN119) is played back.
Fixed side clearance 0mm
5-6
5.3.2 Tip consumption detection

In this section, the operating conditions for determining how the gun tip consumption is to be detected (gun
search) are set. These settings must be performed for all the spot welding tools that are to be used.
Fig. 5.3.1 Servo gun electrode wear
2 Select the <Spot Constant> f key. The same menu can be selected by pressing
[8.Spot Welding Application] from <Constant Setting> f key.
>>The constant setting menu used exclusively for spot welding such as the one
Menu items for title No.3 and following are displayed only when servo guns have
been set.
3 Align the cursor with [6 Tip consumption detection] and pres [Enter] key.
>>A setting screen such as the one shown below appears.
4 The setting screen corresponding to the number of pre-defined spot welding

tools now appears.
If a multiple number of spot welding tools have been defined, input the number
in the edit box at the very top of the screen and press [Enter] key or press the
<Prev gun> or <Next gun> f key to switch the spot welding tool number.
5 If there is an edit box, input the appropriate number, and press [Enter] key.
5-7
If the radio buttons are used, press the [ENABLE] and left or right cursor keys
＋ at the same time to select their settings.
If the combo box (box with the arrow at the far right) is used, align the cursor
with it, and press [Enter] key. A table with a list of selection candidates now
appears. Use the up or down cursor key to select the chosen candidate, and
press [Enter] key again.
6 Upon completion of the settings, press the <Complete> f key.

The settings are saved in the spot welding constant file, and the editing screen
is closed.
(To stop editing at any time, press [RESET/R] key.)
Only the basic parameters will be described below. For an explanation of all the parameters displayed, refer to
the operating manual “APPLICATION MANUAL SPOT WELDING".
Table 5.3.3 Tip consumption detection

Factory
settings
Move-tip consump. 0% If the tip consumption is to be detected using gun search 1 alone or
rate using gun searches 1 and 3 together, only the "total tip
consumption," which is obtained by adding the moving side electrode
tip consumption and fixed side electrode tip consumption, can be
detected. Using the value set here, the "total tip consumption" is
divided into two parts, the moving side electrode tip consumption and
the fixed side electrode tip consumption.
(This parameter cannot be used with gun search 2.)
5-8
Chapter6 Arc welding setup
This chapter describes the setup work procedure for operators who will be operating the
robot for the arc welding application.
6.1 Outline of setup work ................................................................................................. 6-1

6.1.1 Setup relating to welding power supply .......................................................... 6-1
6.1.2 Setup relating to external input/output signals................................................ 6-1
6.2 Checking the welding characteristics data and wire feed characteristics data ........... 6-2
6.3 Allocating the dedicated arc welding input/output signals .......................................... 6-4
6.3.1 Allocating the dedicated arc welding input/output signals............................... 6-4
6.3.2 Table of input signals ...................................................................................... 6-5
6.3.3 Table of output signals.................................................................................... 6-6
6.1Outline of setup work
6.1 Outline of setup work

Follow the setup work procedure relating to arc welding set forth below when operating the robot for the arc
welding application.
6.1.1 Setup relating to welding power supply

If the robot and welding power supply were purchased at the same time and a request for the arc welding
setup has been made to Daihen, this setup is unnecessary.
At this point, simply check whether the welding characteristics data has been registered.
See "6.2Checking the welding characteristics data and wire feed characteristics data".
The setup work must be done if operators aim to do the setup themselves or if the welding power supply is
to be changed after the robot was delivered. For further details, refer to the instruction manual
“APPLICATION MANUAL ARC WELDING”.
6.1.2 Setup relating to external input/output signals

In addition to the basic input/output signals which were covered by "Setup" in Chapter 4, a number of
input/output signals which can be used only for the arc welding application have been provided.
Set up these signals in line with the specifications of customer.
See "6.3Allocating the dedicated arc welding input/output signals ".
This work need not be done if the robot is not going to be connected to an external device.
6-1
6.2Checking the welding characteristics data and wire feed characteristics data
6.2 Checking the welding characteristics data and wire

feed characteristics data
Upon request of the arc welding setup, the welding characteristic data and the wire feed characteristic data has
been setup in line with the purchased welding power supply.
At this point, simply check whether the welding characteristics data has been registered.
Do not change the registered welding characteristics data and wire feed
characteristics data without good reason.
If any changes have been made in the data, the welding characteristics and wire feed
characteristics will be changed. This means that they will be at variance from the
CAUTION actual operating environment. As a result, the welding results will be adversely
affected.
Checking the welding characteristics data and wire feed characteristics data
Before proceeding, switch the operator specifications qualification to EXPERT or above.
1 In the teach mode, pressing f5 <Arc Constant> - [4 Setting of weld data].

>>The screen for setting the characteristics data now appears. Check the data on this
screen.
Presented above is an example of a screen displayed with the DP350 (specifications

for Japan). (The display screen and maximum number of data registered depend on
the type of welding power supply connected.)
2 When a multiple number of welding power supplies have been connected, press
[Enter] in the "welding power supply" field to select the welding power supply
whose data is to be set.
This operation need not be performed if only one welding power supply has been
connected.
3 After checking the data, press [RESET/R].

>>The screen is now closed.
To register new welding characteristics data, proceed as follows.
6-2
6.2Checking the welding characteristics data and wire feed characteristics data
4 Move to the target location using [Up] or [Down], and press f8<Select>.
>>A list of the characteristics data now appears.
5 While reading the comments, select the desired characteristics data, and press
[Enter].
>>The characteristics data is now selected. Repeat these steps for as many times as
necessary.
6 Upon completion, press f12<Complete>.

>>This completes the registration of the characteristics data.
6-3
6.3Allocating the dedicated arc welding input/output signals
6.3 Allocating the dedicated arc welding input/output

signals
This section describes the input/output signals which are used exclusively for arc welding. Included among
these signals are the "In welding" output signal and "Welding ON/OFF" input signal.
Whereas the "basic input/output signals" are used as standard signals for all applications, the signals described
in this section are used for the arc welding application only.
If the application of the robot is set for "arc welding," some of these signals are already allocated prior to
shipment.
6.3.1 Allocating the dedicated arc welding input/output signals

The method used to allocate the input/output signals is exactly the same as the one used to allocate the
"basic input/output signals".
Allocating the dedicated arc welding input/output signals

2 Select <Constant Setting> - [6 Signals] - [2 Input Signal Assignment] - [3 Arc

inputs].
>>The screen for setting the allocation of the arc input signals as shown below now
appears.
For the output signals, select <Constant Setting> - [6 Signals] - [3 Output Signal
Assignment] - [3 Arc Outputs].
3 Allocate the output signals by performing the same operations as for the basic
input/output signals.
4 Upon completion of the settings, press <Complete (f12)>.

>>The settings are now saved in the constant file.
6-4
6.3.2 Table of input signals

The following input signals can be used with arc welding.
In the table, "M1 to M6" and "W1 to W4" refer to the numbers of the manipulators and the numbers of the
welding power supplies that serve as the target of the signal operations, respectively.
For example, M1 refers to the signal that operates manipulator 1, and W1 refers to the signal that operates
welding power supply 1. With a standard robot system which has one manipulator and one welding power
supply, perform settings for M1 and W1 only. (M2 to M6 and W2 to W4 can be ignored.)
Table 6.3.1 Dedicated arc welding input signals

Factory
Input signal name settings Description of function
Input signal
Weav ON (M1 to M6) 0 This signal controls the weaving ON and OFF
statuses from the external source.
W.P.S. failure (W1 to W4) 0 The trouble which is relayed from the welding power
supply is input to the robot by this signal.
Wire not fed (W1 to W4) 0 The out of wire status which is relayed from the
remaining wire detection unit (option) is input to the
robot by this signal.
Low gas pressure (W1 to W4) 0 The low gas pressure status which is relayed from
the gas pressure detection unit (option) is input to
the robot by this signal.
Cooling water (W1 to W4) 0 The out of cooling water status which is relayed from
the out of cooling water detection unit (option) is
input to the robot by this signal.
Not enough wire (W1 to W4) 0 The insufficient remaining wire status which is
relayed from the remaining wire detection unit
(option) is input to the robot by this signal.
Ope. preparation (W1 to W4) 0 Whether the is in the operable status is input to the
robot by this signal. When this signal is to be used,
the welding interface must be remodeled.
Gas ON/OFF (W1 to W4) 0 This signal controls the shielding gas ON and OFF
statuses during automatic operation.
Inching ON/OFF (W1 to W4) 0 This signal controls the wire inching.
Retract ON/OFF (W1 to W4) 0 This signal controls the wire retracting.
Wire speed change (W1 to W4) 0 This signal switches the inching or retracting speed
(to low speed or high speed).
Welding ON/OFF (W1 to W4) 27 (W1) This signal controls the welding ON and OFF
0 (W2 to W4) statuses from the external source.
Whole OFF cancel (W1 to W4) 0 If the robot is operating in the "Whole sect. W OFF"
status after an arc start failure, this signal releases
this status.
"Whole sect. W OFF" means that welding in all the
remaining welding sections is canceled.
Scratch start (W1 to W4) 0 This signal is used to perform scratch start.
"Scratch start" refers to the start method by which
welding is started without checking whether arc start
has been completed.
Abnorm. sect. OFF (W1 to W4) 0 This signal prevents welding from being performed
after welding trouble has occurred in the welding
section concerned.
Weld OFF cancel (W1 to W4) 0 If the robot is operating in the "Section weld OFF"
status after an arc start failure, this signal releases
this status.
"Section weld OFF" means that welding is canceled
only in the welding section concerned after trouble
has occurred.
WCR input twin AS (W1 to W4) 0 This defines the start check method when
performing simultaneous arc start using two
manipulators in a twin synchromotion system.
Wire short circu. (W1 to W4) 0 This checks for wire short-circuiting.
6-5
6.3.3 Table of output signals

The following output signals are used with arc welding.
In the table, "M1 to M6" and "W1 to W4" refer to the numbers of the manipulators and the numbers of the
welding power supplies that serve as the target of the signal operations, respectively.
For example, M1 refers to the signal that is output from manipulator 1, and W1 refers to the signal that is
output from welding power supply 1. With a standard robot system which has one manipulator and one
welding power supply, perform settings for M1 and W1 only. (M2 to M6 and W2 to W4 can be ignored.)
Table 6.3.2 Dedicated arc welding output signals

Factory
Output signal name settings Description of function
Output signal
Weav ON (M1 to M4) 0 The weaving ON or OFF status is output.
Welding failure (W1 to W4) 18 This is output when welding trouble has occurred.
Wire stick check (W1 to W4) 17 This is output when wire stick has occurred.
Arc not generated (W1 to W4) 0 This is output when the arc has run out.
Wire not fed (W1 to W4) 0 This is output when the wire has run out.
Gas pressure (W1 to W4) 0 This is output when the gas pressure is low.
Cooling water (W1 to W4) 0 This is output when the cooling water has run out.
Arc start failure (W1 to W4) 0 This is output when an arc start failure has occurred.
W.P.S. unready (W1 to W4) 0 This is output when a welding power supply
not-ready trouble (no communication with welding
power supply) has occurred.
Not enough wire (W1 to W4) 0 This is output when the remaining wire has become
insufficient.
W.P.S. failure (W1 to W4) 0 This is output when welding power supply trouble
has occurred.
Ope. preparation (W1 to W4) 0 This is output while the "Ope. preparation" input
signal is input to the robot. When this signal is to be
used, the welding interface must be remodeled.
WCR short-circuit (W1 to W4) 0 This is output when WCR short-circuiting trouble
(when WCR is short-circuited even though no arc
has been generated) has occurred.
WI/F time out (W1 to W4) 0 This is output when WIF timeout trouble (no
response from the welding power supply) has
occurred.
Multi-pass weld (W1 to W4) 0 This is output during the execution of a multi-layer
sequence welding section.
In welding (W1 to W4) 0 This is output when welding is being performed. This
signal is not output when no arc has actually been
generated.
In welding sect. (W1 to W4) 0 This is output while a welding section is being
executed. This signal is output even when no arc has
actually been generated. One example of this would
be a case where check GO or BACK has been
initiated for the welding section.
Welding ON/OFF (W1 to W4) 0 The welding ON or OFF status is output.
Wire inching (W1 to W4) 0 This is output during inching.
Wire retracting (W1 to W4) 0 This is output during retracting.
Arc gas ON (W1 to W4) 0 This is output while the gas is output.
During AS cmd (W1 to W4) 0 This is output when the arc start command is issued
to the welding power supply.
W.P.S. pulse cmd (W1 to W4) 0 This is output when the pulsed welding conditions
are controlled by the welding power supply.
Scratch start set (W1 to W4) 0 This is output when scratch start has been selected.
Weld current fail (W1 to W4) 0 This is output when trouble with the welding current
(the current level has exceeded the rating) has
occurred.
Weld voltage fail (W1 to W4) 0 This is output when trouble with the welding voltage
(the voltage level has exceeded the rating) has
occurred.
6-6
Factory
Output signal name settings Description of function
Output signal
WCR input twin AS (W1 to W4) 0 This is output when the WCR check function is
enabled by the "WCR input twin AS" input signal.
Abnorm. sect. OFF (W1 to W4) 0 Section OFF has been set by the "Abnorm. sect.
OFF" input signal as the operation to be performed
after welding trouble has occurred.
Whole sect. WOFF (W1 to W4) 0 Automatic operation is continued by the "Whole sect.
WOFF" setting after an arc start failure has occurred.
Section weld OFF (W1 to W4) 0 Automatic operation is continued by the "Section
weld OFF" setting after an arc start failure has
occurred.
Current Cond. 0 This is output during the welding section when the
(W1 to W4) current condition type is set at the wire speed.
Voltage Adjustment Method 0 This is output during the welding section when the
(W1 to W4) voltage adjustment mode is individual (voltage
command).
6-7
NOTE
6-8
Chapter 7 Preparations for automatic
operation
This chapter describes the usual preparatory steps taken to operate the robot
automatically.
7.1 Specification of the operation method.......................................................... 7-1

7.1.1 Controller operation ............................................................................ 7-1
7.1.2 External operation ............................................................................... 7-1
7.1.3 Multi-station operation......................................................................... 7-6
7.1.4 “Motors ON external” signal assignment ............................................. 7-7
7.2 Setting multi-station operation ..................................................................... 7-8
7.2.1 Connecting the operation boxes and start boxes ................................ 7-8
7.2.2 Registering the number of stations ..................................................... 7-8
7.2.3 Allocating the start signals (only when using stations 5 to 10) ............ 7-9
7.2.4 Allocating the input/output signals for multi-station use ...................... 7-9
7.2.5 Allocating the program to be started ................................................. 7-10
7.3 Home position registration ..........................................................................7-11
7.3.1 Home position registration by referencing the program .....................7-11
7.3.2 Home position registration by manual recording ............................... 7-14
7.3.3 Home position registration by numeric input ..................................... 7-15
7.4 Registering Start Enable Area.................................................................... 7-16
7.4.1 Registering the start enable area ...................................................... 7-16
7.4.2 Checking the unit if it is in the start enable area................................ 7-17
7.4.3 Checking which axis is out of the start enable area .......................... 7-17
7.5 READY status output signals..................................................................... 7-18
7.5.1 Controller READY signals ................................................................. 7-18
7.5.2 Unit READY signal ............................................................................ 7-18
7.5.3 Status output signals ......................................................................... 7-20
7.6 Interference Territory registration ............................................................... 7-23
7.6.1 Registering the interference Territory ................................................ 7-23
7.6.2 Utilizing the Interference Territory ..................................................... 7-26
7.1 Specification of the operation method

When the robot is operated under normal circumstances, it is operated not using the teach pendant but using
input signals from an external source.
The method of performing all the operations from the teach pendant is called "controller operation." On the other
hand, the method that is based on signals from an external source is called "external operation."
7.1.1 Controller operation

The series of operation-related commands such as start, program selection and stop are all executed on the
operation panel, operating box or teach pendant of controller.
At the factory, the robot was set to the controller operation mode.
For further details on operation, refer to the Basic Operations Manual.
7.1.2 External operation

The series of operation-commands related to such operations as start, program selection and stop are input
from an external device such as a host controller or operator console.
If the robot could be started from both the teach pendant and external input signals, this would be extremely
dangerous. Therefore, only one of these command input methods can be used for such commands as the
start command and program select command. (Conversely, commands from any sources are accepted at
all times for the safety commands such as the stop and emergency stop command.)
Host controller or
Teach pendant operating console, etc.
Start input,
program
number input
Controller External
controller
Fig. 7.1.1 Controller/external operation for motors ON/START select and program selection command
The switching of the start command to controller (operation using teach pendant) or external (operation by
input signals) is known as "motors ON/START select." It is the same with the program selection command.
Controller or external can be set independently for these commands.
Setting controller or external for motors ON/START select, program select
1 Teach or playback may be set as the mode.
2 Press the <Teach/Play Condition> f key.

>>The Teach/Playback Conditions setting screen such as the one shown below now
appears.
The same menu also appears when [1 Teach/Playback Condition] are selected from
the <Service Utilities> f key.
7-1
3 Align the cursor with "Motors ON/START sel. source," and press the [ENABLE]
＋ and left or right cursor keys to select the settings of the radio buttons (the
horizontal rows of selector buttons).
Motors ON/
Description/Explanation
START select
Controller - The Motors can be turned ON using the [Motors ON] button.
- Automatic operation can be initiated using the [START BUTTON].
External - The Motors can be turned ON using an external input signal.
(“MotorsON external”) from an external device. (NOTE)
- Automatic operation can be initiated by an external input signal
(“External play start.”) from an external device. A signal is assigned
as a standard signal for the external start signal. (I30)
(NOTE) When shipping, the ”MotorsON external” is not assigned to any signal
number. To use this signal from external device (e.g. PLC), please assign this
function to an external input signal in advance. (e.g. I29)
4 In the same way, align the cursor with "Playback mode prog. sel.", and press
＋ the [ENABLE] and left or right cursor keys to select the settings of the radio
buttons (the horizontal rows of selector buttons).
Playback mode
Description/Explanation
program select
Controller Programs can be selected from the teach pendant.
External Programs can be selected by input signals (external program
selection signals) from an external device. A signal up to 8 bits is
assigned as a standard signal for the external program select
signal.
In the teach mode, programs cannot be selected using the external input signals.
"External" for program select is set only in the playback mode.

The settings are saved in the file, and so their statuses are retained even when
the power is turned off.
== Switching both signals simultaneously in a single action ==
6 Press the [Start Ext·Prog Ext/Start Con·Prog Con] keys at the same time as the
＋ [ENABLE] key.
>>Each time these keys are pressed, "Controller" or "External" for the motors ON/
START select and program select signals is switched in synchronization.
＋ This is useful when the motors ON/START select and program select settings are
to be used in the same status.
When this key is used, there is no need to press the [Complete] key.
If the f key [Start Ext·Prog Ext/Start Con·Prog Con] has not been assigned, it can
be assigned by selecting <Constant Setting> - [7 f-Keys] - [2–4 Soft Key Layout].
With "External" for the program select signal, the number of the program to be played back is determined by an
input signal from the external source. There are several ways to read the program numbers.
Read through the following, and proceed with operation using the settings tailored to the system.
Specification of the external program select method

1 On the same setting screen as the one mentioned above, align the cursor with
"Selection type."
There are three ways to read the program select bits (16 signal lines): "binary,"
"discrete" and "BCD (Binary Coded Decimal)."
2 Press [ENTER] to select one of the methods as followed.
External program selection method

Binary With this method, the signals are read out as binary numbers. If, for
instance, bits 3 and 5 are ON, program no.20 (22+24 = 4+16) will be
selected.
7-2
Discrete With this method, the number of the bit turned ON by the signal is used as
the program number. This means that only programs with numbers from 1
to 16 can be selected. If two or programs are input at the same time, the
one with the lower number is selected.
BCD With this method, the signal is read out as a BCD code. If, for instance,
(Binary bits 3 and 5 are ON, program no.24 will be selected since the 1's digit is
Coded 22=4 and the 10's digit is 21=2.
Decimal)
Program select bit U1

Signal 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 ９８７６５４３２１
Binary 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
Discrete 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 ９８７６５４３２１
BCD 1000's digit 100's digit 10's digit 1's digit
Signals 1 to 16 are the numbers of the 16 "Program sel. bits" input signals.
When "binary" or "BCD" is selected for the "selection system," a multiple number of
signal lines are read so that the program strobe signal for determining their read
timing is used. There is a special method that does not use the program strobe signal,
as set forth below.
3 On the same setting screen as the one mentioned above, align the cursor with
"Strobe signal."
There are two method: one uses the program strobe signal and the other does not
use it.
Strobe signal Description/Explanation

Used When the robot is to be started from an external source, maintain a
pulse width of at least 0.2 sec. for the start signal. Input the strobe
signal when at least 0.01 sec. has elapsed after the program select
signal has stabilized. If the start status has already been established
by this time, program selection is executed at this time. If the start
status is not established, program selection is executed as soon as
the start signal has been input.
(Program selection range: 0 to 9999) (Note that even No.0 can be
selected.)
Unused When the robot is to be started from an external source, maintain a

pulse width of at least 0.2 sec. for the start signal. At the point when
no change has occurred for 0.10 sec. after the program select signal
was input, the input signal is considered to be a definite signal, and it
can be captured. If the start status has already been established by
this time, program selection is executed. If the start status is not
established, program selection is executed as soon as the start signal
has been input. (Program selection range: 0 to 9999) (Note that No.0
cannot be selected.)
4 Press [ENABLE] and left or right cursor keys to select the settings of the radio
＋ buttons (the horizontal rows of selector buttons) and select one of these two
methods.
7-3
When using a strobe signal

■ In a case in which “Program strobe” is inputted after “Ext.play start”
(Motors should be turned ON in advance by using the “MotorsON external” input signal.)
a pulse of 200ms or more
Ext. play start. (I)

When the “Program
selected” is outputted,
Program sel. bits (I) The program number is determined
turn OFF these signals.
10ms
(P1- P16)
Program strobe (I)

150ms at maximum 200ms
Program selected (O)
Program echoback bits (O)

(P1- P16)
(The robot’s actual motion
status)
(I) : Input signal (From external device to robot controller / (O):Output (From robot controller to external device)
- “Ext. play start” signal should be a pulse signal of 200ms or more.

- “Program strobe” signal should be inputted after the “Program sel.bits” signals are inputted and all
of those signals get stable and 10ms or more passed. If the “Program strobe” signal is inputted
during the “Program sel.bits” are still unstable, an unexpected program number may be chosen.
- The pulse’s width of the “Program selected” signal is 200ms at the factory(default) setting. But the
width can be changed in the following setting menu.
→<Constant Setting>[6 Signals][1 Signal condition][6 Program acknowledge time] (unit : sec)
CAUTION - “Program selected” and “Program echoback bits” are outputted when the actually selected
program starts.
- When the “Program selected” is outputted, turn OFF the “Program sel.bits” and the “Program
selected” signals altogether.
7-4
■In a case in which “Program strobe” is inputted before “Ext.play start”

When the “Program selected”

is outputted, turn OFF these
Program sel. bits (I) signals.
The program number is determined
10ms 400ms
(P1- P16)
Program strobe (I)

150ms at maximum 200ms

(P1- P16)

status)
(I) : Input signal (From external device to robot controller) / (O):Output (From robot controller to external device)
- “Ext. play start” signal should be a pulse signal of 200ms or more.

- “Program strobe” signal should be inputted after the “Program sel.bits” signals are inputted and
all of those signals get stable and 10ms or more passed. If the “Program strobe” signal is inputted
during the “Program sel.bits” are still unstable, an unexpected program number may be chosen.
- The pulse’s width of the “Program selected” signal is 200ms at the factory(default) setting. But the
width can be changed in the following setting menu.
CAUTION →<Constant Setting>[6 Signals][1 Signal condition][6 Program acknowledge time] (unit : sec)
- “Program selected” and “Program echoback bits” are outputted when the actually selected
program starts.
- When the “Program selected” is outputted, turn OFF the “Program sel.bits” and the “Program
selected” signals altogether.
7-5
When not using a strobe signal

Input the “Ext. play start” signal after the combination of “Program sel.bits” gets sufficiently stable (100
msec or more ). In this case, the “Ext. play start” signal plays a role of “Program strobe” signal at the same
time.

When the “Program
selected” is outputted, turn
Program sel. bits (I) Wait for the signals to get stable OFF these signals.
(P1- P16)
150ms at 200ms
maximum

(P1- P16)

status)
(I) : Input signal (From external device to robot controller / (O):Output (From robot controller to external device)
(NOTE 1) “Ext. play start” signal should be a pulse signal of 200ms or more.
(NOTE 2) The pulse’s width of the “Program selected” signal is 200ms at the factory(default) setting.
But the width can be changed in the following setting menu.
→<Constant Setting>[6 Signals][1 Signal condition][6 Program acknowledge time] (unit : sec)
CAUTION (NOTE 3) “Program selected” and “Program echoback bits” are outputted when the actually
selected program starts.
(NOTE 4) When the “Program selected” is outputted, turn OFF the “Program sel.bits”.
7.1.3 Multi-station operation

Task programs can be started and reserved by pressing the [START BUTTON] on the operation box
installed on each station. It is supported when operating box / start box is connected.
Robot
Work bench 1
Work bench 3
Operation
Operation box 3
box 1
Task programs are started or

Work bench 2
reserved by pressing the start
Operation button on the operation box
box 2 installed at each station.
Fig. 7.1.2 Multi-station operation
7-6
7.1.4 “Motors ON external” signal assignment

In the FD controller, the “Motors ON external” signal is not included in the terminal block on the
sequence board. So if you want to turn the Motors ON using the external PLC etc., it is necessary
to assign a general input signal to the “Motors ON external” in advance. See “4.6.2 Standard input
signals” also.
(In this example, the “Motors ON external” is assigned to the input signal 29.)
This “Motors ON external” input signal can be assigned in the menu of

<Constant Setting> - [6 Signals] [2 Input Signal Assignment] [1 Standard Inputs].
7-7
7.2 Setting multi-station operation

The following connections must be made and settings selected in order to perform multi-station operation.
• Connecting the operation boxes and start boxes

• Registering the number of stations
• Allocating the start signals (only when using stations 5 to 10)
• Allocating the input/output signals for multi-station use
• Allocating the program to be started
7.2.1 Connecting the operation boxes and start boxes

Up to four stations are supported under the standard specifications.
If there are four or fewer stations, connect the operation box (station 1) to the sequence board and the start
boxes (stations 2 to 4) to the connection ports of the operation box.
For details on the connections, refer to Chapter 3 "Connections".
If stations 5 or more are to be used, use the free input pins on the relay unit or the Arc I/F board for the
connections.
(Then allocate them by operating the robot in such a way that these input pins will be used as the start signal
inputs.)
7.2.2 Registering the number of stations

The number of stations must be registered when multi-station operations are to be performed.
(Normally, this need not be done since the number of stations that corresponds to the customer's
specifications was already selected at the factory.)
An operator must have the qualifications class of EXPERT of above to change the number of stations.
Registering the number of stations

1 Select <Constant Setting> - [5 Operation Constants] - [6 The number of
stations].
>>The number of stations registration screen now appears.
2 Input the number of stations. A setting of "0" cancels multi-station operation.
3 Press f12 <Complete>.

>>The number of stations is registered, and the display returns to the previous
screen.
7-8
7.2.3 Allocating the start signals (only when using stations 5 to 10)
If there are four or fewer stations, the start signal and stop signal are placed in the input enable status simply
by connecting the operation box and start boxes. (These signals are directly coupled to the fixed inputs on
the sequence board.)
If stations 5 or more are to be used the signals must be allocated in such a way that the start signals are
input as the robot status input signals (station 5 start to station 10 start).
Allocating the start signals (only when using stations 5 to 10)

1 Select <Constant setting> - [6 Signals] - [2 Input Signal Assignment] - [9
Multi-station Inputs].
>>The input signal allocation screen now appears.
2 Input the numbers of the input signals to be used as the station 5 to 10 start
signals, and press [Enter].
3 Press f12 <Complete>.

>>What has been allocated is stored in the memory, and the display returns to the
previous screen.
7.2.4 Allocating the input/output signals for multi-station use

The following signals have been provided as the input/output signals specifically used for multistation
operation.
Table 7.2.1 Input signals for multi-station use
Factory-set
Input signal name Description of function
input signal
Reset attained 0 When multi-station operations are to be performed, any
program which is to be started by each station can be
allocated, and the allotment count (projected production
count) can also be set at the same time. When this
allotment count is set ahead of time, the allotment reached
signal will be output to an external device when the
production count (number of times the END command has
been executed) has reached the allotment count.
This signal is used to reset the allotment reached signal.
(At the same time, the production count is set to zero.)
Start station n 0 Up to four stations are supported as standard. If stations 5
(n = 5 to 10) or more are to be used, "station n start (n = 5 to 10)" signal
must be allocated to the actual input signal from the
corresponding start box.
(There is no need to allocate the start signals for stations 1
to 4 since they are fixed input signals.)
7-9
Table 7.2.2 Output signals for multi-station use

Factory-set
Output signal name Description of function
output signal
Reserved unit St.* , 1 to 4 0 This outputs the number of the unit which is being
(*: Station No.) reserved by station ∗.
Unit numbers 1 to 9 are indicated as follows using four
signals.
Signal 4 3 2 1
Binary 3
2 2
2
2
1
2
0
Reserved prog St. ∗, 1 to 16 0 This outputs the number of the program which is being
(∗: Station No.) reserved by station ∗. Program numbers 1 to 9999 are
indicated as follows using 16 signals.
Signal 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
15
Binary 2 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
BCD 1000’s digit 100’s digit 10’s digit 1’s digit
Whether a binary output or BCD output is used depends

on the what has been selected by <Constant Setting> —
[6 Signals] — [1 Signal Condition] — [2 Output method of
program and step number].
Attained St. ∗ 0 This is output when the production count of station ∗ has
reached the allotment count. Similar signals are also
provided for stations 2 to 6.
Start lamp St. ∗ 0 Allocate this signal when the start underway or reservation
underway signal for station ∗ is to be output to an external
device.
It is output as a level output for start underway and as a
pulse output for reservation underway.
Running St. ∗ 0 This level signal indicates that station ∗ is now starting. It
is output during the automatic operation in the playback
mode of the program in which start has been assigned.
Reserved St. ∗ 0 This level signal indicates that station ∗ is reserved.
Whereas "Reserved" indicated by the start button or
station start lamp signal is a pulse output signal, this is a
level output signal.
Order St. ∗ 0 This level signal indicates the sequence of the station ∗ (*:
1 to 10) reservations. Reservation sequence 1 to 10 is
indicated by four signal lines.
Bit: ４３２１ For example, when bits 1 and 3
Output value: 8 4 2 1 are ON, the reservation
sequence No. is 5 (1+4).
7.2.5 Allocating the program to be started

The programs to be started are allocated ahead of time for each station. (The teach pendant is used for the
allocation.)
For details on the operation method, refer to the Basic Operations manual.
7-10
7.3 Home position registration

When a multiple number of robots are to be started up together from the host controller unless start is instructed
after it has been verified that the robots are at their prescribed positions (home positions), they may, in a worst
case scenario, interfere with one another.
To solve this problem, whether the robots are at their prescribed positions can be verified by means of an output
signal by registering the home positions of the robots.
In checking the home positions, the positions of each robot axis are directly monitored so that the operator can
know for sure that a robot is at its home position by the output signal.
Range in which work home

position is registered
While the robot is in this range, the

home position output signal is set to
ON; when it is outside this range, it
is automatically set to OFF.
Fig. 7.3.1 Home position
Up to 32 home positions can be registered per unit (the unit in which the task program is configured).
Some methods are provided for registering. First, the usual registration method is described.
7.3.1 Home position registration by referencing the program
1 First, teach the position that is to serve as the home position using the robot.
Select any program, and record the actual position as a step.
Any interpolation type, speed or tool number is acceptable.
>>Normally, this step should be the first step (move command) in the program which
is to be started from the work home position. Any program and any step with any
number will do. Make a note of them.
3 Select <Constant Setting> - [9 Territory Definition] - [1 Home Position].

>>A screen such as the one shown below now appears.
7-11
4 Align the cursor with "Area Definition," and press[ENABLE] and left or right
＋ cursor keys together to set the radio button to "Defined."
>>The home position setting screen such as the one shown below now appears.
5 Leave the "Position" setting as "Program" and the "Range" setting as "TCP."
6 Align the cursor with "Program No.," input the number of the program
prepared in 1, and press [Enter] key.
In the same way, align the cursor with "Step No.," input the step number, and
press [Enter] key. A step No. indicating a move command—not a comment or
other function command—must be input without fail.
>>The data recorded in the program and step which were input is now called, and
the positions recorded for the axes are displayed in the center.
7 Align the cursor with "TCP," input the home position range here, and press
[Enter] key. The diameter of a spherical shape that can be visualized is input
here. The home position signal is output when the tool tip is inside this
spherical shape.
Normally, about 20 mm is recommended.
>>The size of the spherical shape is broken down into the angles of the axes, and a
range is now displayed at the positions recorded for the axes in the center.
8 Press the <Complete> f key.

This now completes the settings.
If the position of the program and step which were input in 6 has been modified or if
interim steps have been deleted or inserted at any point after this, the setting for the
step number of the home position will be automatically updated in tandem with this
change.
By having the step in the registered program serve as the first step in the program
which is started, no further attention need be paid to the home position registration
even when the position in that step has been modified by teaching after home
position registration.
(However, in the event that the registered step itself has been deleted, the home
position registration will be deleted in tandem with this deletion.)
7-12
Registering a multiple number of work home positions
9 A multiple number of home positions can be recorded. (Up to 32 positions per

unit) To switch the screen, press [Prev No] or [Next No] key.
Alternatively, align the cursor with the "Territory No." in the edit box, input the
home position number directly, and press [Enter] key.
Basic output signal is allocated to only “Territory No.1” when shipped. To use No.2 and
up, basic output signals must be allocated for each of it.
Output signal number currently assigned is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Specifying the range on an axis by axis basis
10 The range of the home position can be specified directly for each of the axes.
Set "Range" to "Angle" rather than to "TCP."
>>The range input field changes as shown below. Input the range directly in degrees
into the range field of each axis (the edit box on the right of + –).
When auxiliary mechanisms are present
11 If an auxiliary mechanism such as servo gun or travel unit is being used, "Aux.
mechanisms," which is a new item, is displayed. Depending on the
characteristics of the mechanism concerned, the home position may or may not
be monitored.
Select one or the other. In the case of a servo gun, select "Ignored."
When “Ignored” is selected,

setting item for auxiliary
axis disappears.
7-13
7.3.2 Home position registration by manual recording

This method is used to record the home position directly without referencing the program. Operate the robot
to set it.
The home position registration is not changed in tandem with any modifications made by teaching, and the
absolute position is now registered. Unlike the program reference system, a programs need not be provided
ahead of time.
Only the differences from the program reference system will be described below.
1 Set "Position" to "Manual."

>>The setting screen changes as shown below.
2 Turn on the motor power (servo power), and move the robot by manual
operations to the position which is to serve as the home position.
Once the position has been determined, release the enable switch.
(Alternatively, turn off the motor power.)
3 Press the <Current Record Posi.> f key.

>>The current position is read from the robot encoder, and the position data of each
axis is displayed in the center.
4 Set the "TCP" in the same way as with referencing the program. (The next steps
are the same.)
7-14
7.3.3 Home position registration by numeric input

This method is used to record the home position directly without referencing the program. Key in the position
data directly from the teach pendant.
The home position registration is not changed in tandem with any modifications made by teaching, and the
absolute position is now registered. Unlike the program reference system, a programs need not be provided
ahead of time.
Only the differences from the program reference system will be described below.
1 Set "Position" to "Numerical."

>>The setting screen changes as shown below.
2 Move the cursor to the "Territory" field, input the position of each of the axes
directly in degrees, and press the [Enter] key.
>>It is possible to input positions that significantly exceed the software limits
(operating ranges) of the axes. Some axes which have been excluded from being
the target of inspection for their home positions can be supported by setting a high
value.
The same result can be achieved by proceeding as follows: after "Position" has been
set to "Program," the program and step have been specified and the position data has
been read, switch the "Position" setting to "Numerical," and modify the position of each
axis.
3 Set the "TCP" in the same way as with referencing the program. (The next steps
are the same.)
7-15
7.4 Registering Start Enable Area

This function enables to register the safe position to start the robot (Start enable area), which restricts the start if
the robot is not within the specified area. The difference from the home position registration system is that robot
controller itself can confine the robot start.
To restrict the robot start by robot controller using the Start enable area, the setting for
“Start enable area” shall be specified as the condition of “Unit READY” in the section
IMPORTANT 7.5.2 Unit READY signal.
The start enable area can be registered to the mechanism one to one. When all the mechanisms included in a
unit are in the registered area, the unit is considered within the range of start enable area. For the management
unit, all the mechanisms in a system are to be checked.
7.4.1 Registering the start enable area

Note that the operator qualification of EXPERT or higher is required for this operation.
2 Select <Constant Setting> - [9 Area] – [3 Possible Field to start].

>>The following screen appears.
3 Align the cursor with “Area Definition” and press [Enable] + [Right/Left] key at a
time to move the radio button to “defined”.
4 Move to the axis to set the area, and press [Enter] key.
>>Now, you can input the value. To restore the screen, press [Enter] key again.
5 When the value input is available, enter the area to set and press [Enter] key.
>>The input is now fixed. No more value input is available.
7-16
For the rotation axis, specify the area within the range of -999.0 ﾟ - 999.0 ﾟ. For
the slide axis, -9999.9mm - 9999.9mm.
The axis, of which both “Max.” and “Min.” have been set at 0.0, is not to be
checked whether it is in the start enable area or not.
6 When the value input is available, press f key <Record Current Position>.
>>The current position of the axis to input is recorded.
7 Press [UNIT/MECHANISM] key to move to the next mechanism.

>>The cursor moves to the first axis of the following mechanism, renewing the
mechanism No. of f key <Manual speed>.
8 After inputting the start enable area, press f key <Complete>.

Thus, the setting is complete.
7.4.2 Checking the unit if it is in the start enable area

This section describes how to check if the unit is in the start enable area.
1 Switch the unit that checks if the robot is in the start enable area to the current
＋ unit by pressing [Enable] + [UNIT/MECHANISM] key.
2 When the current unit is within the start enable area, the following icon appears
in the “Variable status display area”.
If not, this icon does not appear.
7.4.3 Checking which axis is out of the start enable area

When the current unit is out of the start enable area, it is enabled to check which axis is out of the range.
There is no requirement on the operator qualification to perform this operation.
2 Select <Constant Setting> - [9 Area] - [3 Possible Field to start]].

>>The following screen appears.
The axis out of the start enable area should be indicated in red.
On the other hand, the mechanism not included in the current unit should not be
indicated in red even if out of the area.
7-17
7.5READY status output signals
7.5 READY status output signals

If the robot is to be started from an external source, it is necessary to check beforehand whether the robot is
actually in a status in which it can be started. This job is done by the controller READY signal , Unit READY signal,
and status output signal.
Ensure that these output signals are used by the host controller as conditions of the start command for the robot.
7.5.1 Controller READY signals

This level signal is output after the power has been turned on when the operating system (Windows) and the
robot software have started up in sequence and normal control is exercised. It is only when this signal has
been output that the status in which I/O (Input/Output) control is enabled is established.
This signal has been assigned as a standard signal to serve as one of the basic output signals.
Once this signal is turned ON, this signal is never turned OFF until the controller power is turned OFF.
7.5.2 Unit READY signal

This level signal is output in a status in which the auto operation (starting in playback mode) is acknowledged.
The robot cannot be started unless the conditions are met. (This controller itself will not accept start.) This
signal has been assigned as a standard signal to serve as one of the basic output signals.
The signal can be set using a combination of several conditions. Generate the "unit READY" signal by
combining each of the conditions in the sequence below.
Generating the unit READY signal

2 Select <Constant Setting> - [6 Signal attributes] - [4 Unit Ready Signal].

The unit READY signal turns ON only when each of the conditions listed vertically
has been met. It remains OFF when even one condition has not been met.
3 Align the cursor with the item to be set.

＋ The check box can be moved by pressing the [ENABLE] and left or right cursor
keys.
4 Align the cursor with the item serving as the ON condition of the output signal,
＋ and press [ENABLE] + [ON] keys.
>>This will place a check mark in the box.
If the item is not going to serve as an ON condition, press [ENABLE] + [OFF]

keys.
＋
>>This will remove the check mark from the box. It is acceptable to place more than
one check mark inside a horizontal row of boxes. It is also acceptable for no check
marks to be placed inside the boxes.
(No changes can be made in those boxes which have been set to the disable status.
Only a display appears in these boxes.)
7-18
In the following case, for example, the condition can be formed when the start
selection is set to “Controller” or “External”. If putting multiple checkmarks in a single
horizontal row like below, these items can be combined with the OR condition.
With no checkmark, the condition will be independent of the output signal.

In the following example, the condition can be formed regardless of the start
selection, whether “Controller”” or “External”.
For the details of each condition, see Table 7.5.1.
5 After all the items have been set, press the <Complete> f key.
>>This has the immediate effect of setting the output signals ON or OFF.
6 To clear all the check boxes at a time, press the <Initialize> f key.
>>The check marks in all the check boxes of the status output signals currently
displayed are now cleared.
Prior to shipment from the factory, no checkmark should be placed in any of the check
POINT boxes.
This means that the unit READY output signal is always ON by the initial setting.
As for the disabled (grayed-out) boxes;

POINT Setting condition (ON/OFF) of these boxes will change when the items lower than “Temp
stop input” are checked and f12 <Complete> key is pressed. To turn OFF the check
marks, please use “Initialize” f-key.
Table 7.5.1 Condition group used for Unit READY

Unit
Item Details
READY
Operation mode Playback: The condition is met when playback is set as the operation mode. ×
TP selector SW AUTO: The condition is met when the teach pendant selector switch is set to
×
auto.
Operation ready ON: The condition is met when the motor power (servo power) is set to ON. ×
Auto operation Stop: The condition is met when auto operation is not underway. ×
Temporary stop input No input: The condition is met without any temporary stop input signal. ○
Pouse No input: The condition is met without any pose input signal. ○
Hold No input: The condition is met without any pose input signal. ○
Start enable area Within the area: The condition is met with the robot in the start enable area.
However, it is unconditional in the following cases.
・When the start method is “Multi-stationt”.
(1) At a temporary stop
(2) The task program selected in the unit has been allocated as the start
station and the current step is halfway with “Restart method in Play
mode” set to “Specified”. ○
・When the start method is “Controller/External”.
(1) At a temporary stop
(2) The current step of the task program selected in the unit is halfway.
The status “the current step is halfway” means that the current step is at the
level of step excluding “0 [START]” and “END <FN92> function command with
yellow color”.
Arbitrary logical input Input ON: The condition is met when any designated logical input signal is set to
ON.
Input OFF: The condition is met when any designated logical input signal is set
○
to OFF.
However, it is unconditional during a temporary stop and also with the logical
input signal of 0.
Start selection Controller: The condition is met when motors ON/START selection is set to
controller.
○
External: The condition is met when motors ON/START selection is set
to external.
Program selection Controller: The condition is met when program selection is set to controller.
○
External: The condition is met when program selection is set to external.
7-19
Unit
Item Details
READY
Soft Limit Inside range: The condition is met when the soft limit has not been detected. ○
Link Soft Limit Inside range: The condition is met when the link soft limit has not been
○
detected.
Screen editor Complete: The condition is met excluding during screen edit. ○
○ Can be set as the condition.
× Does not serve as a condition.
To specify the start enable area as a condition of the unit READY, see 7.4Registering
Start Enable Area and follow the procedures to register the start enable area.
IMPORTANT
7.5.3 Status output signals

A signal known as a "status output" signal can be created by combining a number of statuses as desired.
Unlike the unit READY output signal described above, controller itself will never fail to accept the start
regardless of whether the "status output" signal is ON or OFF.A multiple number of "status output" signals
can be defined, and the signal with the first condition among them has been assigned as a standard signal to
serve as one of the basic output signals.
Follow the procedure below to create the "status output" signal by combining each of the conditions.
Generating a status output signal

2 Select <Constant setting>-[6 Signal attributes] - [5 State output customization].

The status output signal turns ON only when each of the conditions listed vertically
has been met. It remains OFF when even one condition has not been met.
3 Press the [Prev No] or [Next No] f key or input a number in "Status output
signal" at the very top of the screen, and press [Enter] key. This enables one of
the 16 status output numbers provided to be selected.
4 Align the cursor with the item to be set.

＋ The check box can be moved by pressing [ENABLE] and left or right cursor
keys.
7-20
5 Align the cursor with the item serving as the ON condition of the output signal,
＋ and press [ENABLE] + [ON] keys.
>>This will place a check mark in the box.
If the item is not going to serve as an ON condition, press [ENABLE] + [OFF]

keys.
＋
>>This will remove the check mark from the box. It is acceptable to place more than
one check mark inside a horizontal row of boxes. It is also acceptable for no check
marks to be placed inside the boxes.
(No changes can be made in those boxes which have been set to the disable status.
Only a display appears in these boxes.)
In the following case, for instance, the condition is met when the Playback mode is "1
cycle" or "Continuous." If, as in this case, a check mark has been placed in more than
one box in a horizontal row, the settings are combined by an OR condition.
Conversely, a case where none of the boxes has a check mark is handled in the
same way as a case where check marks have been placed in all of the boxes. In the
example given below, the condition is set whether the Playback mode is set to 1
step, 1 cycle or continuous, which means that it has nothing to do with the output
signal.
For the details of each condition, see Table 7.5.2.
6 After all the items have been set, press the <Complete> f key.
>>This has the immediate effect of setting the output signals ON or OFF.
7 To clear all the check boxes together, press the <Initialize> f key.
>>The check marks in all the check boxes of the status output signals currently
displayed are now cleared.
Prior to shipment from the factory, no check marks were placed in any of the check
boxes.
This means that the status output signal is always ON with the initial setting.
Table 7.5.2 Condition group used for the status output

Item Details
Unit This specifies the number of the unit that serves as a condition. (1 to 9)
Either the same unit or various different units can be specified for all 16 status
output signals. With a single unit, only one signal is involved so no attention need
be paid to this operation.
Operation mode Playback: The condition is met when playback is set as the operation mode.
Teach: The condition is met when teach is set as the operation mode.
High-speed teach: The condition is met when high-speed teach is set as the
operation mode (option).
TP selector SW The teach pendant selector switch is not installed as a standard specification.
Normally, do not place a check mark for either mode.
AUTO: The condition is met when the teach pendant selector switch is set to auto.
Manual: The condition is met when the teach pendant selector switch is set to
manual.
Playback Mode 1 step: The condition is met when the operating mode is set to single step.
1 cycle: The condition is met when the operating mode is set to single cycle.
Continue: The condition is met when the operating mode is set to
continuous.
Step single Continue: The condition is met when step feed is set to continuous.
Single: The condition is met when step feed is set to single.
Operation ready ON: The condition is met when the motor power (servo power) is set to ON.
OFF: The condition is met when the motor power (servo power) is set to OFF.
Auto operation Start: The condition is met when auto operation is underway.
Stop: The condition is met when auto operation is not underway.
Temporary stop input Input ON: The condition is met when the stop input signal is set to ON.
Input OFF: The condition is met when the temporary stop input signal is set to
OFF.
7-21
Item Details
Arbitrary logical input Input ON: The condition is met when any designated logical input signal is set to
ON.
Input OFF: The condition is met when any designated logical input signal is set to
OFF.
Start selection Controller: The condition is met when motors ON/START selection is set to
controller.
External: The condition is met when motors ON/START selection is set to
external.
Program selection Controller: The condition is met when program selection is set to controller.
External: The condition is met when program selection is set to external.
Machine lock Enabled: The condition is met while machine lock is established.
Disabled: The condition is met while machine lock is not established.
Soft Limit Inside range: The condition is met when the soft limit has not been detected.
Outside range: The condition is met when the soft limit is being detected.
Link Soft Limit Inside range: The condition is met when the link soft limit has not been detected.
Outside range: The condition is met when the link soft limit is being detected.
Encoder battery Normal: The status is established when no fault in the encoder battery is
detected.
Unusual: The condition is met when fault has occurred in the encoder battery.
Spot weld Weld ON: The condition is met when spot welding is set to pressure ON.
Weld OFF: The condition is met when spot welding is set to pressure ON.
No SQZ: The condition is met when spot welding is set to pressure OFF.
User level USER or below: The condition is met when the current operator classification
class is USER or below.
EXPERT or above: The condition is met when the current operator classification
class is EXPERT or above.
Playback speed Less than 100%: The condition is met when the speed override ratio is lower than
override 100%.
100%: The condition is met only when the speed override ratio is 100%.
Excess of 100%: The condition is met when the speed override ratio is higher
than 100%.
Mechanism servo OFF ON: The condition is met when there is at least one mechanism of the individual
mechanism OFF.
OFF: The condition is met when there is no mechanism of the individual
mechanism OFF.
7-22
7.6Interference Territory registration
7.6 Interference Territory registration

In case that robot operating envelop overlaps with another robot because they are installed so closely, robot
will collide each other when they run into the overlapping area at the same time. This trouble can be avoided by
using I/O interlocking signals. In advance, overlapping area (= Interference territory) must be defined in each
robot (controller).
Controller 1 “Interference Territory”

Robot 1 Overlapping area of robot
operating envelop (defined as
box or sphere)
In order to avoid the collision

of robot in the interference
territory, I/O signals are used
for interlocking.
Robot 2
Controller 2
Fig. 7.6.1 Image of Interference Territory
Up to 16 interference territories can be registered per unit (the unit in which the programs is configured).
Input / output signals for interference territory are not allocated when shipped.
If this utility is necessary, these signals must be allocated by referring to “4.6 Signal
IMPORTANT attribute settings”.
7.6.1 Registering the interference Territory
1 First, teach the position that is the “center” of interference territory using the
robot. Select any program, and record the actual position as a step.
3 Select <Constant Setting> - [9 Territory Definition] - [2 Territory Field].

7-23
4 Align the cursor with "Area Definition," and press the [ENABLE] and left or right
cursor keys together to set the radio button to "Defined."
>>Interference territory setting screen such as the one shown below now appears.
5 Leave the "Position" setting as "Program".
6 Select either of “Box” or “Sphere” setting as “Shape of area”.

(Following screen is in case that “Sphere” is selected.)
7 Align the cursor with "Program No.," and “Step No.”, then input the number of
the program and step No. prepared in 1, and press the [Enter] key.
This step must indicate a move command without fail.
>>The data recorded in the program and step is now called, and its XYZ position data
are displayed in the “Center” position.
8 To define the size of interference territory, align the cursor to “Depth”, ”Width”
and “Height” in case of “BOX”, or align to “radius” in case of “Sphere”. Input
each length and press the [Enter] key
In case of “Box” In case of “Sphere”

Height
Radius
Depth
Recorded point
Width (TCP = Tool Control Point)
Definition of Interference Territory
7-24
9 Press the <Complete> f key.

This now completes the settings.
10 If plural interference territories need to be defined, switch the screen by

pressing [Prev No] or [Next No] key and continue the registration procedure.
11 Next, following I/O signals for all interference area need to be allocated.
Basic input signal “Territory position 1 to 16”
Basic output signal “Territory position 1 to 16”
“4.6 Signal attribute settings”
Furthermore, it is strongly recommended that logic of above output signal is

changed to “N“. Select <Constant Setting> - [6 Signals] - [7 Signal Attribute] - [2
Output Signal], and change logic to “N” (negative) of the output signal which is
allocated to “Territory position 1 to 16” signal.
This is a sample screen when output signal No.10 is allocated to “Interference area”.
When robot is outside the interference territory, “interference area output signal” is ON.
And before robot is getting into the interference territory, robot waits for “interference
area input signal” ON.
12 Next, “Max. radius of tool” Tool shape is considered

parameter needs to be defined. as the sphere whose
“4.5.6 Max. Radius of tool” center is TCP (tool control
Robot point) and whose radius is
“Max. Radius of tool”.
When checking the interference
between the robot (tool) and
interference territory, tool shape is
considered as the sphere whose
center is TCP (tool control point) TCP
(Tool Control Point)
and whose radius is “Max. Radius Interference
of tool”. If tool scale is not to be Territory
ignored, please define its size. Max. Radius of tool
Example of “Box”
14 Similar setting is necessary to the other robot that has same interference
territory.
In case that “Position” is set to except “Program” in step 5

7 When set to “Manual” :
Move the robot by manual operation to the center position of interference
territory , and press f11 < Record Current Position. > key.
Current position is read from the robot encoder, and the position data is displayed in
the center.
When set to “Numerical” :

Directly key in the XYZ value in “Center” of interference territory.
7-25
7.6.2 Utilizing the Interference Territory

Special function is unnecessary to be recorded to check the interference of robot.
While the check GO/BACK operation and playback operation, interference checking is automatically
performed by following procedure when robot is getting into the interference territory. (In following
description, R#1 means the subject robot and R#2 means the opposite robot that has same interference
territory with R#1.)
Here, “Territory position output signal” which is allocated by the pre-described procedure is directly
connected to “Territory position input signal” of the opposite robot without changing its logic.
(1) Immediately before R#1 gets into the interference territory, R#1 checks “Territory position input signal”
from R#2.
(2) If “Territory position input signal” was ON, R#1 turns OFF the “Territory position output signal” and gets
into the interference territory because R#2 is outside the interference territory.
(3) If “Territory position input signal” was OFF (this means R#2
is still in the interference territory), R#1 starts waiting until
R#2 goes out of the interference territory and “Territory
position input signal” is turned ON,. While waiting, right
message will be displayed.
(4) After R#2 goes out of the interference territory and “Territory position input signal” is turned ON, R#1
turns OFF the “Territory position output signal” and gets into the interference territory.
(5) When R#1 goes out of the interference territory, “Territory position output signal” is turned ON.
7-26
Chapter 8 Connection to Ethernet
This chapter describes how to use FTP (File Transfer Protocol) which is performed
between the robot controller and the other nodes (such as PC) on the network using
the Ethernet function.
8.1 Outline ..................................................................................................... 8-1

8.1.1 Outline............................................................................................. 8-1
8.1.2 Network setting ............................................................................... 8-1
8.1.3 Connection of Ethernet cable.......................................................... 8-2
8.1.4 File transfer process ....................................................................... 8-2
8.2 Ethernet setting ....................................................................................... 8-3
8.2.1 TCP/IP setting ................................................................................. 8-3
8.2.2 FTP setting...................................................................................... 8-5
8.3 File transfer (FTP client) .......................................................................... 8-7
8.3.1 Registrations of FTP Server (Host) ................................................. 8-7
8.3.2 File download.................................................................................. 8-9
8.3.3 File upload .....................................................................................8-11
8.3.4 Referent Log ................................................................................. 8-12
8.4 File transfer (FTP server)....................................................................... 8-13
8.1Outline
8.1 Outline
8.1.1 Outline
To use the Ethernet function enables various files to be transferred between this controller and the other
nodes (such as PC) on the network using FTP (File Transfer Protocol). Data such as constant files, PLC
program files, task program files etc. are stored in the memory of this controller. This function can be used to
download or back up (upload) these data.
Other node（PC etc.）
FTP
• Program file
• Constant file etc.
can be transferred.
Ethernet
Robot controller
Fig. 8.1.1 Ethernet
To transfer files, the operation can be done both from the PC and from this controller.
POINT See technical books offered commercially if necessary for various technical terms such as
Ethernet, DHCP, IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, and FTP etc.
This instruction manual shows the operation for this controller. Prepare separately necessary software for
the PC.
8.1.2 Network setting

To enable this controller to communicate on Ethernet networks, the network configuration including this
controller shall be set at first. There are following two methods for that.
Select an appropriate method following the instructions of customer network administrator.
Table 8.1.1 Setting of network configuration

Method Details
Automatic setting using Network configuration is set automatically using DHCP (Dynamic Host
DHCP Configure Protocol).
Each setting value such as IP address or subnet mask is manually input
Manual setting inputting
from the screen of teach pendant. It is used when DHCP is not available
each setting value
for some reason.
File transfer between the node and this controller through the network will be available, when the setting
according to the setting method in "8.1.2Network setting" is completed and this controller is correctly
recognized on the network.
Input each selection value such as IP address and subnet mask manually.
IMPORTANT
8-1
8.1Outline
8.1.3 Connection of Ethernet cable

Connect the Ethernet cable to
CNLAN1 connector which is located
on the face of the CPU board.
When directly connecting this

controller to PC without using
switching HUB and or so, cross cable
is needed to be prepared.
CNLAN1
Fig. 8.1.2 Connection of Ethernet cable
Same shaped connectors (CNLAN2 and CNLAN3) near CNLAN1 are used for different
purpose (for teach pendant and for IPM drive unit). If Ethernet cable is connected to
these connectors by mistake, this controller will never function correctly.
CAUTION
8.1.4 File transfer process

Transfer of files using FTP is performed between the FTP server and the FTP client. Operation is done
at the FTP client to copy a remote file into a local computer and to copy a local file into a remote computer.
There are following two methods to transfer files.
Table 8.1.2 File transfer method

FTP server FTP client Details
Files are transferred using the operation menu of this controller.
This controller works as an FTP client (the node to start the FTP
requirement).
PC This controller
Operator
Other nodes
This controller
(PC etc.) FTP File transfer
FTP server FTP client
Files are transferred using FTP client software operating on

other nodes. This controller works as an FTP server (host).
This controller
Operator PC
Other nodes
This controller FTP File transfer
(PC etc.)
FTP client FTP server
When this controller is the FTP server and when one or more FTP clients
are connected, the icon shown right will be displayed to indicate the
connection. When the connection to the FTP server is disconnected, this
icon will disappear.
8-2
8.2Ethernet setting
8.2 Ethernet setting

The Ethernet menu has following functions that are set in the teaching mode / constant setting menu.
This important setting shall be done by customer network administrator. For this controller, the operator license
of SPECIALIST is necessary.
Table 8.2.1 Constant setting menu of Ethernet

Operation menu Details
TCP/IP is set. Two methods are selectable:
Automatic setting using DHCP or manual setting inputting each setting value.
TCP/IP
When manual input of each value is selected, input the IP address and the
subnet mask etc.
FTP is set.
FTP This menu can change the FTP server setting set in the Microsoft Internet
Information Server.
When ”system memory protection function” has been set to enabled,

”system memory protection function” is needed to be changed “disabled” before the
setting of section “8.2.1TCP/IP setting” or “8.2.2 FTP setting”.
IMPORTANT (1) Change the operator qualification to EXPERT or higher.

(2) Proceed to <Service Utilities> - [13 System Environments].
(3) Check the setting of System Memory Protection Function
8.2.1 TCP/IP setting

TCP/IP Settings
1 Select Teaching Mode.
2 Select <Constant setting> – [8 Communication] – [2. Ethernet] – [1 TCP/IP].

>> Setting screen of TCP/IP appears as shown below.
3 Set the necessary parameter referring to "Table 8.2.2 TCP/IP setting".
4 When the setting is completed, press f12 <Complete>.
5 To enable the new settings, restore the power of the robot controller.
8-3
8.2Ethernet setting
Table 8.2.2 TCP/IP setting

DHCP client Sets whether to use [DHCP client function] of this controller.
When "Enabled" is selected, this controller sends DHCP requirement to the network
at the time of power ON. When the DHCP host on the network responds, IP address,
subnet mask, default gateway, and three or less DNS IP address are set
automatically. If no response is given to the DHCP requirement of this controller, or
DHCP is “Disabled”, the appropriate value shall be input manually.
Ensure that DHCP requirement is generated only when the power of this controller is
turned on. To send DHCP requirement again, power shall be restored.
Computer name This is the computer name to identify this controller on the network.
IP address This is the IP address to identify the TCP/IP host (this controller) on the network.
Subnet mask This is the data to define the border (mask) for IP address so that TCP/IP can
distinguish [Network ID] and [Host ID].
Default gateway Specifies the gateway address if communication with the host in some other network
is needed. Normally, it is not needed. If necessary, input the value instructed by your
network administrator.
DNS server This is the IP address of DNS server.
Normally, it is not needed. If necessary, input the value instructed by your network
administrator.
When the computer name or IP address overlap, communication will be disrupted.

Ensure that the computer name and IP address are not duplicated in any of the
IMPORTANT devices that are connected to the network.
8-4
8.2Ethernet setting
8.2.2 FTP setting

FTP Settings
1 Select <Constant setting> – [8 Communication] – [2. Ethernet] – [3 FTP].
>> Following setting screen will appear.
2 Set the required parameter referring to "Table 8.2.3 FTP setting".
3 When the setting is completed, press f12 <Complete>.
4 To enable the new settings, restore the power of the robot controller.
Table 8.2.3 FTP setting

FTP service Sets whether to enable [FTP service function] of this controller. When it is enabled
and controller power is turned on, FTP service will be started. When it is disabled,
FTP service from the FTP client for this controller will be stopped.
Anonymous Sets the authorization of anonymous connection. When [Only Allowed] is set, the
Account user will not be able to log on with his/her user name and the password. The
account that has the administrative access right will be prevented from accessing it,
but only the account specified as an anonymous access can access it.
Connectable Sets the maximum connectable number to one server at the same time. The
number number can be from 16 to 1000.
Timeout period Sets the time to disconnect the inactive user from the server on the second time
scale. The timeout period can be set in the 0 to 900 seconds. This value enables
FTP protocol to close all the connection even when it fails.
FTP home Sets the directory path to be used for FTP service. The directory path can only be set
directory to directories under “D:¥”. The directory path cannot be set to any other directories.
Directory When “Write only” or “Read/Write” are selected, to write a file from a client to an FTP
Permission server is permitted. This setting is only for the directory to receive files from users.
FTP login message Is displayed on the client connected to the FTP server for the first time.
8-5
8.2Ethernet setting
Registrations of Users that Admit to Login

1 Press f10<Registration of user name> on the FTP setting screen.
>> The “Registration of FTP user" screen shown below appears.
2 Point the cursor with “User name” and input the user name which is admitted
＋ to login.
For inputting character strings, press [ENABLE] and [EDIT] keys together to
open the soft keyboard.
3 Point the cursor to “password” and then input the password.
4 Point the cursor to “*password” and then input the same password as 3.
5 Upon completion of the setting, press f12<Complete>.

>> The completion of user registered screen shown below appears.
6 When the User deleted, point the cursor to any of one “User name" or
“Password” or “*Password”, and then press f9<Delete user>.
>> The confirmation of user deleted screen shown below appears.
Select [YES] and press [Enter].

>> The user to be selected is deleted.
8-6
8.3File transfer (FTP client)
8.3 File transfer (FTP client)

Files are transferred using the operation menu of this controller. This controller works as an FTP client (the
node to start the FTP requirement). To use FTP client function, Ethernet Setting such as TCP/IP and FTP shall be
completed beforehand. The details are given in "8.2 Ethernet setting".
PC Robot controller
Operator
FTP File transfer
FTP server FTP client
Fig. 8.3.1 File transfer with robot controller as FTP client
8.3.1 Registrations of FTP Server (Host)

Before using the FTP client function, it is necessary to set a host, which will be the FTP sever for
connection, according to the following steps.
Up to 2 FTP servers can be connected to this controller. This is an important setting and must be made by
your network administrator. Operator qualification as the SPECIALIST is necessary.
Registrations of FTP Server (Host)

1 Press f4 <File>.
When soft keys are not provided, service menu can be used for entry. In this
case, select [7. File Manager] from service menu and press [Enter] key
>> File manager menu such as the following is opened.
2 Align the cursor on the [8 File Transfer (Ethernet FTP)] and press [Enter] key.
>> A screen such as the following is displayed.
8-7
3 Press f7 <Setting of Host>.

>> Host setting screen such as the following is displayed.
4 Refer to Table 8.3.1 Host setting Host setting and set necessary parameters.
5 When the edit box is available, enter numerical values and press the [Enter]
key.
For entering character strings, soft keyboard can be used by pressing the
＋ [ENABLE] key and the [EDIT] key simultaneously
6 When the host has been set, press f12<Complete>.
Table 8.3.1 Host setting

Parameters Functions
Connect Host Used to set the name of host for connection on the network.
Name IP address can also be set directly.
Up to a maximum of 15 characters can be entered.
Display Host Name Used to set the host name for display on the FTP client menu.
User ID Used to set the user name for logging it into the host.
Password Used to set the password for logging in with the above user ID.
Init. folder Used to set the folder pass to refer to when the connection to the host is completed.
Enter the relative pass from the home directory of the host.
‘¥’ is used to delimit the folder.
Retry count When data logging into the host is failed, set the repeating number of data logging.
INFO. Host setting is also used for automatic backup function. When the backup device is set to
"Host 1" or "Host 2", host is connected with this setting during backup operation. In this
case, a backup folder is created on the initial folder of the set host for connection.
8-8
8.3.2 File download

Remote files are copied to the local computer (this controller).
Only qualified operators above EXPERT may perform this operation.
File Download
1 to 2 Perform the same operation as “8.3.1 Registrations of FTP Server
(Host)”.
3 Press f12<Connect> to connect to the FTP server.

>> A log-in screen such as the one shown below appears.
4 Position the cursor on the host selection column and press the [Enter] key.
>>Two host names are displayed in the pull-down menu as shown.
5 Select the host for connection with [Up] or [Down] keys and press the [Enter]
key.
6 Input the password for logging in to the FTP server in the “Password” field.
＋ If the user ID is set to “Anonymous,” leave this field blank.
For inputting character strings, press [ENABLE] and [EDIT] keys together to
open the soft keyboard.
7 When the cursor is in the password column, press the [Enter] key. When the
cursor is in the host column, press the [ENABLE] key and the [Enter] key.
The host is connected to the specified FTP server.
or Login screen is closed automatically.
＋
8 When host is connected properly, the file in the initial folder is displayed. The
initial folder is set by the host setting mode. (Refer to “8.3.1 Registrations of
FTP Server (Host)”). When the initial folder is not set or when the directory set
in the initial folder does not exist under the home directory, internal home
directory is displayed.
In this case, the beginning of the folder list is displayed by the name set in the
host name for display.
>> The file list of the FTP server is displayed. The following is an example.
8-9
9 Select a file in the FTP server to be transferred.

Select a file using the [Up] or [Down] key, and press [Enter]. The selected file
is highlighted in blue.
A multiple number of files can be selected by repeating these steps.
To release the selected status, select the file to be released, and press [BS].
To select all files, press the f10<Select All File>.
When the all file selection mode is reset, press the <Release All File> (ENABLE +
f10).
10 Move to the “Device” selection field in the “Local controller” (this controller)
section, and select a device.
11 Select the file type to be listed.
12 Select the folder of the local controller (this controller) to which the files are to
be transferred.
13 Press f9 <Host->FD> after selection.

>> File transfer (downloading) now starts.
14 Upon completion of all the File transfer needed, press the [RESET/R] key to
close the menu.
During the playback operation, no constant files or initial-value files which affect the robot
operation are allowed to download.
IMPORTANT
8-10
8.3.3 File upload

Copy local files into the remote computer as described below.
Only qualified operators above EXPERT may implement this process.
File Upload
1 to 8 Perform the same process as download from step 1 to 8.
9 At the remote host, select the folder to which files are transferred.
10 At the device selection field of the local controller, select the device.
11 Select the file type to list.
12 Select the file to transfer at the local controller.

Select the file with [Up] or [Down], and press [Enter]. The selected file will be
highlighted in blue.
Multiple files can be selected by repeating this operation.
To release the selected status, select the file to be released, and press [BS].
To select all files, press the f10<Select All File>.
When the all file selection mode is reset, press the <Release All File> (ENABLE +
f10).
13 Press f8 <FD-> Host>.

>> File transfer (upload) starts.
14 When the necessary file transfer is completed, press [RESET/R] to exit the
menu.
8-11
8.3.4 Referent Log

Record of communication with the FTP server is referenced.
This operation should be carried out by the qualified operator of the SPECIALIST qualification or above.
2 Operations are the same as those of down load operation from 1 to 2.
3 Press the <Referent Log> (ENABLE + f8) key and the log list such as the
following is displayed.
4 To display the list, press [Up] or [Down] keys for vertical list scrolling and
press [Right] or [Left] keys for lateral list scrolling.
5 Pressing the [RESET/R] key ends the log list screen.
Table 8.3.2 Log Setting

Status Log display
Sever connection succeeded Host: Server was connected to the [Host name].
Server connection failed Host: Server could not be connected to the [Host name].
Server connection shutoff Server connection was shut off.
Folder list Acquisition succeeded [File number] file was acquired in the file list.
Folder list Acquisition failed File could not be acquired in the file list.
1 file Upload execution [File name] was uploaded.
Write inhibit file Upload [File name] is protected and could not be uploaded.
Upload when writing of the same name [File name] could not be uploaded due to “Do not overwrite”
file is inhibited operation.
Upload when the capacity is insufficient [File name] could not be uploaded because of insufficient
storage capacity.
Upload failed due to unknown cause [File name] could not be uploaded
Upload suspended Uploading was suspended.
1 file Download execution [File name] was downloaded.
Changing in playback mode not allowed
[File name] could not be downloaded due to playback mode.
File Download
Write inhibit file Download [File name] is protected and could not be downloaded.
Download when writing of the same [File name] could not be downloaded due to “Do not overwrite”
name file is inhibited operation.
Download when the capacity is [File name] could not be downloaded because of insufficient
insufficient storage capacity.
Download failed due to unknown cause [File name] could not be downloaded.
Download suspended Download was suspended.
8-12
8.4File transfer (FTP server)
8.4 File transfer (FTP server)

Files are transferred from FTP client software operating on some other node as described below. This
controller works as an FTP server (host).
No operation is especially required at this controller. Files can be transferred even while playback operation. To
use the FTP server function, Ethernet setting such as TCP/IP or FTP shall be completed beforehand. The details
are given in "8.2 Ethernet setting".
PC Robot controller
Operator
FTP
FTP client FTP server
Fig. 8.4.1 File transfer with robot controller as FTP server
Be careful when files are transferred to this controller during the playback operation.
Do not transfer constant files or initial-value files which directly affect the robot operation.
Caution is demanded when the FTP server function is used, because special restriction
IMPORTANT for the file transfer is not applied in this controller.
8-13
8.4File transfer (FTP server)
NOTE
8-14
http://www.nachi-fujikoshi.co.jp/
Shiodome Sumitomo Bldg. 17F,

Phone: Fax:
Japan Main Office 1-9-2 Higashi-Shinbashi
+81-3-5568-5245 +81-3-5568-5236
Minato-ku, TOKYO, 105-0021 JAPAN
Nachi Robotic Systems Inc. (NRS) http://www.nachirobotics.com/
North America Headquarters Phone: 248-305-6545 Fax: 248-305-6542 22285 Roethel Drive, Novi, Michigan 48375-4700 U.S.A.
Training Office Phone: 248-334-8250 Fax: 248-334-8270 22213 Roethel Drive, Novi, Michigan 48375 U.S.A.
Greenville Service Office Use 248-305-6545 Use 248-305-6542 South Carolina, U.S.A.
San Antonio Service Office Use 248-305-6545 Use 248-305-6542 Texas, U.S.A.
Kentucky Branch Office Phone: 502-695-4816 Fax: 502-695-4818 116 Collision Center Drive, Suite A, Frankfort, KY 40601 U.S.A
89 Courtland Avenue, Unit 2, Vaughan,
Toronto Branch Office Phone: 905-760-9542 Fax: 905-760-9477
Ontario L4K3T4 CANADA
Urbina # 54, Parque Industrial Naucalpan,
Mexico Branch Office Phone :+52-555312-6556 Fax:+52-55-5312-7248
Naucalpan de Juarez, 53370, Estado de México, MEXICO
Canada 544 Privada Luxemburgo
Saltillo Service Office Phone :+52-844416-8053 Fax: +52-844416-8053
C. P. 25230, Saltillo, Coahuila, MEXICO
NACHI EUROPE GmbH
Phone: Fax: Bischofstrasse 99, 47809, Krefeld, GERMANY
Central Office Germany
+49-2151-65046-0 +49-2151-65046-90 http://www.nachirobotics.eu/
Phone: Fax: Unit 3, 92, Kettles Wood Drive, Woodgate Business Park,
U.K. branch
+44-0121-423-5000 +44-0121-421-7520 Birmingham B32 3DB, U.K.
Phone: Fax: Obchodni 132, 251 01 Cestlice, PRAGUE-EAST

Czech branch
+ 420-255-734-000 +420-255-734-001 CZECH REPUBLIC
NACHI AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. http://www.nachi.com.au/

Robotic Division & Phone: Fax:
38, Melverton Drive, Hallam, Victoria 3803, , AUSTRALIA
Victoria office +61-(0)3-9796-4144 +61-(0)3-9796-3899
Phone: Fax:
Sydney office Unit 1, 23-29 South Street, Rydalmere, N.S.W, 2116, AUSTRALIA
+61-(0)2-9898-1511 +61-(0)2-9898-1678
Phone: Fax:
Brisbane office 7/96 Gardens Dr,Willawong,QLD 4110, , AUSTRALIA
+61-(0)7-3272-4714 +61-(0)7-3272-5324
NACHI SHANGHAI CO., LTD.
Phone: Fax: 11F Royal Wealth Centre, No.7
Shanghai office
+86-(0)21-6915-2200 +86-(0)21-6915-2200 Lane 98 Danba Road Putuo District, Shanghai 200062, China
NACHI KOREA http://www.nachi-korea.co.kr/
2F Dongsan Bldg.
Phone: Fax:
Seoul office 276-4, Sungsu 2GA-3DONG, Sungdong-ku,
+82-(0)2-469-2254 +82-(0)2-469-2264
Seoul 133-123, KOREA
Copyright NACHI-FUJIKOSHI CORP.

Robot Division
1-1-1, FUJIKOSHIHONMACHI, TOYAMA CITY, JAPAN 930-8511
Phone +81-76-423-5137
Fax +81-76-493-5252
NACHI-FUJIKOSHI CORP. holds all rights of this document. No part of this manual may be photocopied or
reproduced in any from without prior written consent from NACHI-FUJIKOSHI CORP. Contents of this document
may be modified without notice. Any missing page or erratic pagination in this document will be replaced.
In case that an end user uses this product for military purpose or production of weapon, this product may be liable
for the subject of export restriction stipulated in the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Control Law. Please go
through careful investigation and necessary formalities for export.
Original manual is written in Japanese.

Tfden 001 Setup

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Tfden 001 Setup

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Tfden 001 Setup

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

1403, TFDEN-001-009, 001

Chapter 1 Point on Safety

Chapter 2 Transportation and Installation

2.2 Transportation .................................................................................................................................. 2-2

2.4 Installation of robot controller ........................................................................................................... 2-4

3.2 Precautions for Cable connections .................................................................................................. 3-2

3.3 Manipulator connection .................................................................................................................... 3-3

3.5 Operation box & Starting box connection....................................................................................... 3-18

3.5.1 Operation box connection........................................................................................................ 3-18

4.2 Configuration .................................................................................................................................... 4-2

4.3 Mounting a tool................................................................................................................................. 4-3

4.5 Tool constant settings..................................................................................................................... 4-13

4.8.1 I/O area mapping ..................................................................................................................... 4-59

4.11 Setting the [CLAMP / ARC] key ..................................................................................................... 4-73

4.12 Setting the software limit (operating range) ................................................................................... 4-75

4.14 User coordinate system ................................................................................................................. 4-78

Chapter 5 Spot welding setup

5.2 Assignment of spot welding input/output signals ............................................................................. 5-2

Chapter6 Arc welding setup

Chapter 7 Preparations for automatic operation

7.1 Specification of the operation method .............................................................................................. 7-1

Chapter 8 Connection to Ethernet

1.1 For safe use of the robot system ................................................................... 1-1

1.1 For safe use of the robot system

1.1.1 Symbols used in all the instruction manuals

The following symbols are also used for important checkpoints:

A particularly important checkpoint is shown.

1.1.2 General precautions for safe use of the robot system

Table 1.1.1 Conditions when a disaster struck

Example 4 Sudden change of movement from low speed to high speed

Example 5 Manipulation by another operator without permission

The manipulator is operated by different program because of program

The followings are general precautions to prevent a disaster.

Do not get near the manipulator.

Operators must wear helmet, safety shoes and overalls.

Do not alter or remodel our products.

In order to follow above precautions, it is necessary to thoroughly understand the cautions

1.1.3 Safety Measures on manipulator

Never remove or disassemble a balancer as it is compressed under great pressure.

It is not possible to eliminate electromagnetic interference completely using the

1.1.4 Safety measures in teaching and inspection

When a number of operators are involved in the teaching of a manipulator, the

1.Switch ON 2.Switch OFF

3.OK ? (Conf irmation) 4.OK !

Raise the right hand high with palm

5.Wait ! 6.Go away !

LOCKOUT AND TAG OUT EQUIPMENT,

Handling precautions of USB memory

1.1.5 Safety measures in test run

DO NOT enter a guarding fence at any speed during Automatic operation.

1.1.6 Safety measures in auto operation

Operators should be familiarized with the manipulator's movement path, operating

1.1.7 Brake Positive Release

1.1.8 Movement, alienation and selling of robot system

1.1.9 Storage of robot system

For storing a robot system, following ambient conditions shall be met.

1.1.10 Disposition of Robot system

Discard scrapped items safely to avoid injury.

Cautions about Batteries

Dispose of a USB memory according to your domestic regulations.